JP7254325B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of executing a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to give a feeling of excitement by using a display effect.

JP 2016-29956 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
The pending icon includes an icon representing pending and an icon representing the pending,
It is configured to notify the number of pending by the number of display of the pending icon,
The pending icon is an icon that can be displayed in multiple modes,
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed,
The first effect is a effect that may change the mode of the pending icon from the first mode to the second mode,
The second effect is performed after the first effect, and based on the change of the pending icon from the first mode to the second mode, from the changed pending icon in the first direction. It is an effect in which predetermined information is displayed in the first area located,
In the second effect, when the predetermined information is displayed in the first area located in the first direction from the changed pending icon, a predetermined medium having a closed shape is used as a predetermined object. Medium display is executed to reach the first area from the holding icon through
The third effect is performed after the second effect, and the effect indicated by the predetermined information displayed in the first area is performed in the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the operation|movement by a movable accessory (board movable body 15). FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer freeze effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer freeze effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer freeze effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a chance-up meter effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a chance-up meter effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a chance-up meter effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending timer effect A; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a pending timer effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending timer effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the timer ball-out acquisition production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer ball-out acquisition production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer ball-out acquisition production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a losing effect and a big-hit effect. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a resurrection effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a resurrection effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a result effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a result effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a result effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a multiple-index effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a multiple index effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending trigger effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending trigger effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending trigger effect C; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the superimposition success production|presentation A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a superimposed success effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a superimposition success effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating superimposition failure production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the big-hit design display production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot design display production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol display effect|action C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the role-thing pattern display production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the role-thing pattern display production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a button-image meter effect A; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a button image inside meter effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an in-button-image display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an intra-button-image display effect B; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple variation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple fluctuation|variation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple fluctuation production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation charge production|presentation A (success). It is a figure for demonstrating operation charge production|presentation A (failure). It is a figure for demonstrating the operation charge production|presentation B. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo consecutive point effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo consecutive point effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball number display effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a payout display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a payout display effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a prize-winning image/character image superimposition effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a winning image/character image superimposed effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a winning image/character image superimposed effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image movement effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a timer image movement effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image movement effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image tilt display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image tilt display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer image tilt display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining timer button effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer button effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer pseudo-continuous effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a timer pseudo-continuous effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending change effect A; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a pending change effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending change effect C;

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62 , an effect button 63 , a sword member 64 , a sword button 65 , a frame lamp 66 , a speaker 67 and a frame movable body 600 . An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. be. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 . The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a retracted state in which it is stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state in which it protrudes upward from the front frame 53 .

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize winning device (second attacker) 36, a normal prize winning port 27, an out port 16, and displays. 40 and .

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game pegs for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 .

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a pending digested image display region in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called first pending icons. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called a second pending icon. The first pending icon and the second pending icon are collectively referred to simply as pending icons.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also called "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The reserved digested image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the suspended digested image 9C, the first special figure suspension or the second special figure suspension It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that is digested ("digestion of special figure reservation" described later).

The center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 . A movable board body 15 (also referred to as a board movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10.例文帳に追加A stage portion 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which game balls flow in and an exit part from which game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the "lottery for special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big hit is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the ``lottery of normal symbols'' means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above and to the right of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big winning hole 30 has an opening/closing member (first special winning hole opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 It has The second big prize winning opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The normal winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . It should be noted that the number of normal winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. If the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously in the aspect of the variable display.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and the V area. Sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 94. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. ) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . and so on. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, and the board movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the board movable body 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The board movable body 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10 . The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (driving data) that determines the operation mode of the board movable body 15, and controls the operation of the board movable body 15 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation control of the movable board 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

An effect button detection switch 63 a and a frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108 . The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the motion of the frame movable body 600 according to the motion pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed down, a touch sensor provided on the front frame 53 for outputting a detection signal when a human body touches the switch, and the like. may be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a variable probability counter, a time saving counter and the like are set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In the main RAM 84, in addition to the above areas, a win type set buffer in which special figure stop pattern data is set, and drive data for driving the board movable body 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where counters used in sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and include a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Probability variation production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a variable manner remains, and it depends on which design the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. ``Random number for look-ahead effect'' is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect at the time of variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined to be "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, if you win the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the jackpot type random number (any of 0 to 127), the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It is shown that the stop pattern of special figure 2 (special figure stop design) is determined to be "jackpot design 1". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) with different fluctuation times are set. The length of the fluctuation time is SP3>SP2>SP1. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1-3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric tube 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H” or “15H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, the open pattern is “open Pattern 23” is determined. FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second for 1 time at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is At "15H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “big wins” and “losses” as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, the special figure stop symbol data 11H to 14H, 21H jackpots correspond to the "V passage scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates the Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of a game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage expected jackpot" includes "16RV expected passage jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd big prize-winning mouth 35 for maximum 29.5 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). That is, the game state after "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high probability short time state (high probability high base state ), but with a high probability, it becomes a latent state (latent probability variable state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special pattern 2) are all V-passing schedule jackpots. That is, when a jackpot is won by a lottery based on winning a prize to the second starting port 21 that can enter the ball by executing the electric sapo control described later, it is always a V passage scheduled jackpot. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state", and the state in which the probability variation is not controlled is simply "normal probability state ( non-high-probability state, low-probability state). The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". Also, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) is referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , Normal random number) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a reserved ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls to be described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H value), and stores the acquired random number in the first to normal symbol reservation storage areas 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reserved balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the big hit random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-described step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special Figure 2 big hit determination process (step S1402) and special figure 1 big hit determination process (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described collectively. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big-hit determination is performed (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" ~ "P3" as a variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" ~ "P23" is selected.

If the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a reach random number as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P24" ~ "P31" is selected as the variation pattern. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609 different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as a variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" ~ "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808), and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is performed again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set to the time saving counter if it is a low probability high base state, and "160" is set to the time saving counter if it is a high probability high base state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information (probability variable state or not, probability variable counter value, time saving state or not, time saving counter value, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round specifying command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passage scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process is finished.

In the above-described step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. When the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see game state setting processing (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to fraud. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and finish this processing.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "160" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "160" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 160 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the game state set just now.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation explanation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1 to it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number value may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information about the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, if the pre-determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "Pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes the game state information indicating the current game state, the pattern information indicating the pattern as the determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic effect pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, and determines a chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93. - 特許庁

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, of the chance-up production pattern determination table T53, only the portion for determining the variable production pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combinations of stop-display effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, etc. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not being executed (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 to inform the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A RAM 104 is provided with buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 . FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, even if the pre-variation ending command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the preview fade effect of fading the preview image is performed. Do. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a command to end the variation effect from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, when the ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing ends.

9. Operation of Movable Accessory (Board Movable Body 15) FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable accessory (board movable body 15).
The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the movement of the board movable body 15 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. The plate movable body 15 is in the home position when it is in the position shown in FIG. On the other hand, the plate movable body 15 is in the unfolded position as shown in FIG. A performance control microcomputer 91 can control the movement of the board movable body 15 from the home position to the development position. The board movable body 15 is basically located at the home position, and is movably controlled to the expanded position by the performance control microcomputer 91 according to the display performance (game performance). When the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the unfolded position, it is arranged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (on the front side of the display screen 7a). is arranged at a position overlapping with a predetermined region of Therefore, in this case, the board movable body 15 blocks a predetermined area of the display screen 7a as seen from the player. Further, the board movable body 15 has a star-shaped hole 15a in its central portion. Therefore, when the board movable body 15 is in the unfolded position, a part of the display screen 7a can be seen through the hole 15a. Further, when the board movable body 15 is at the home position, the board movable body 15 is positioned so as not to overlap the display screen 7a.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described.
The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in the example of the display effect, the suspension display (suspension icon) is omitted unless it is particularly necessary.

The timer freeze effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. This timer freeze performance can be executed during the variable performance of the decorative patterns, for example, at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, at the start of the variable performance of the decorative patterns, or during the ready-to-win performance (super ready-to-win performance).

[Timer freeze effect A]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect A. FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect A, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 47(A). In this timer display effect, a timer image I1A is displayed. The timer image I1A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image I1A shown in FIG. 47A shows "100 seconds" as the timer initial value. In addition, the ally character CRA is also displayed in the timer display effect. In the display effects shown below, the description of the teammate character CRA will be omitted unless it is particularly necessary. Further, in the upper right of FIG. 47(A), it is shown that the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are the same pattern, and that the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating, that is, the ready-to-win state is shown. . In the following description, when such a reach state is indicated, the description will be omitted unless particularly necessary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(B), a timer stop effect is executed. In the timer stop effect, the effect of stopping when the timer value of the timer image I1A is "77.7 seconds" is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), the timer value stopped by the timer stop performance is reflected in the pattern array of the decorative patterns, and the jackpot notification performance is executed to report it as the jackpot pattern array.

[Timer Freeze Effect B]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect B. FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect B, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 48(A). In this timer display effect, a timer image I1A and a button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The timer image I1A is the same as the timer image I1A in FIG. 47A, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and "100 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(B), a button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1A are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I1C is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I1B is darkened and/or a state in which the button image I1B is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters "PUSH!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. The timer image I1A shows "80 seconds", indicating that the valid operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 48(C), a timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, an effect is executed in which the timer value of the timer image I1A is stopped at 77.7 seconds in response to the player's depression of the effect button 63 by the button valid display effect. Since the button effective display effect starts from the timer value of 80 seconds, the effect button 63 can be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 79 seconds). For example, 79 seconds) is changed at high speed and stopped at "77.7 seconds". Alternatively, the timer value may be stopped immediately at 77.7 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(D), similarly to FIG. 47(C), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the pattern array of the decorative patterns, and the jackpot is announced as the jackpot pattern array. A notification effect is executed.

[Timer Freeze Effect C]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect C. FIG.
First, in the timer freeze effect C, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 49(A). In this timer display effect, a timer image I1D and a button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B is an image suggesting the effect button 63, similarly to FIG. In the timer image I1D, the timer value is displayed in a count-up manner, and "0 second" is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(B), a button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1D are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, similarly to FIG. Adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters “Press!!” are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 . The timer image I1D shows "75 seconds", indicating that the valid operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 starts from 75 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 49(C), a timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, an effect is executed in which the timer value of the timer image I1A is stopped at 77.7 seconds in response to the player's depression of the effect button 63 by the button valid display effect. Since the button valid display effect starts from the timer value of 75 seconds, the effect button 63 can be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 76 seconds). For example, 76 seconds) is changed at high speed and stopped at "77.7 seconds". Alternatively, the timer value may be stopped immediately at 77.7 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(D), similarly to FIG. 48(D), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the pattern array of the decorative patterns, and the jackpot is announced as the jackpot pattern array. A notification effect is executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer freeze effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, timer display (display of a timer image) is executed, and the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). Then, a display for notifying a big win is executed using the stopped timer value. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the button image I1C is displayed while the timer display is being executed, and the timer is displayed in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63. A display is executed in which the displayed timer value is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), and a display informing of a big win is executed using the stopped timer value. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and feel that he or she has participated in the game, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, when the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) by the timer stop effect, When the timer value becomes a value (80 seconds or 75 seconds) before the predetermined value (77.7 seconds), the effective operation period of the production button 63 is started, and the production button 63 is operated within the effective operation period. is operated, the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of surprise, prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the effect button 63, and improve the rate of participation in the game. , and as a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, after the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) by the timer stop effect, the jackpot is displayed. In the notification performance, the pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols is set to be the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped in the timer stop performance, thereby reporting a big win. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the unexpectedness, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), which is zero, in the timer stop effect. After that, in the big win notification performance, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns is set to be the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) which becomes the double number stopped by the timer stop performance, thereby reporting the big win. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the big win in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can quickly recognize the big win. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the timer freeze effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the button image I1C is displayed while the timer display is being executed, and the player operates the production button 63 by the display of the button image I1C. In response to this, a display is executed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), and a display is executed to notify a big win using the stopped timer value. The invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the button image I1C is displayed and the player does not operate the effect button 63, the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). Then, the stopped timer value may be used to display a notification of a big win.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, after the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) by the timer stop effect, the jackpot is displayed. In the notification effect, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols is set to be the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped in the timer stop effect, thereby announcing the big win, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the timer value (77.7 seconds) of the timer display stopped in the timer stop effect may be used as it is to notify the big win.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is 77.7, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, other cohorts such as 11.1, 111, 33.3 are also possible. Further, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is not limited to zero, and may be a predetermined value such as 135.
[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be the number of seconds obtained by subtracting the timer value for stopping by the timer stop effect, which will be described later, from the start number of seconds of the effective operation period. For example, when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds and the timer value to stop by the timer stop effect is 77.7 seconds, the effective operation period may be 2.3 seconds.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer freeze effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed simultaneously. good too.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect I1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
one display of the plurality of types of display is a certain display;
The certain indication may be displayed in the first aspect,
The certain indication may be displayed in a second manner,
The certain display may be displayed in a third aspect,
The certain display of the first aspect is a display of aspects including a display of counting a timer value using a timer image,
The certain display of the second mode is a mode of display including a display of stopping the timer value of the timer image at a first predetermined value,
The certain display of the third aspect is a display of aspects including a display suggesting a big win using the timer value of the timer image,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the first mode, then displayed in the second mode, and then displayed in the third mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect I1-2]
Equipped with an operation unit that can receive a player's operation and execute a predetermined effect by the player's operation,
The certain display may be displayed in a fourth aspect,
The certain display of the fourth aspect is a display including display of an operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit,
The certain display is displayed in the fourth mode while being displayed in the first mode, and the player operates the operation section by displaying the operation section image in the fourth mode. A display that may be displayed in the second mode according to the situation, and may be displayed in the third mode after being displayed in the second mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-1, characterized by:

[Aspect 3]
When the display of the second mode is performed in the certain display, the operation of the operation unit is valid when the timer value reaches a second predetermined value before the first predetermined value. starting a period, and stopping the timer value at the first predetermined value when the operation unit is operated within the operation valid period;
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-2, characterized by:

[Aspect 4]
The third aspect is a display that suggests a big win using a decorative pattern,
When the display of the third mode is performed after the display of the second mode is performed in the certain display, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns is changed to the pattern arrangement of the pattern restrained in the second mode. Suggesting a jackpot by being the same as a predetermined value of 1,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I1-1 to I1-3, characterized by:

[Aspect 5]
The pattern arrangement of the decorative pattern that is the same as the first predetermined value that is restricted in the second aspect is a corolla.
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, characterized by:

The chance-up meter presentation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. This chance-up meter production is performed during a jackpot game, during a variation production of decorative patterns (for example, at the start of a variable display of special patterns, at the start of a variable production of decorative patterns, or during a reach production (super reach production)). can be executed to

[Chance up meter effect A]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up meter effect A. FIG.
In the chance-up meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 50(A), a chance-up meter image I2A and a timer image I2B are displayed. The chance up meter image I2A includes a meter image I2AA, a cursor image I2A1, a chance up suggesting image I2A2, and a chance up schedule suggesting image I2A3. The meter image I2AA is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. indicates the duration of the chance-up meter effect. The chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is arranged on the meter image I2AA. When the cursor image I2A1 moves and the cursor image I2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3, the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is changed to the chance-up completion suggestion image I2A2. The chance-up completion suggesting image I2A2 is arranged on the meter image I2AA, and suggests that the chance-up effect has been executed at that timing.

That is, in the meter image I2AA, the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3, thereby representing the timing from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

The timer image I2B is displayed while the chance-up meter image I2A is being displayed. For example, the timer image I2B is displayed at the start of the chance-up meter effect or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up suggestive image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2B, the timer value is displayed in a countdown method, and 15 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 50(B) or the timing mismatch display effect shown in FIG. 50(D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 50B, in the timing coincidence display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value in the timer image I2B reaches 0 seconds are displayed. A production is performed to indicate that the Note that the timing coincidence display effect is not limited to this, and the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example, 7.77 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(C), a high expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the high-expectation chance-up presentation, a high-expectation chance-up image I2C is displayed. The high-expectation chance-up image I2C is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively high.

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 50(D), the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing when the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds. A production is performed to indicate that they do not match. Note that the timing mismatch display effect is not limited to this, and the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example, 7.77 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(E), a low-expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the low-expectation chance-up presentation, a low-expectation chance-up image I2D is displayed. The low-expectation chance-up image I2D is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. That is, when the low-expectation chance-up image I2D appears, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the high-expectation chance-up image I2C appears.

[Chance up meter effect B]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up meter effect B. FIG.
In the chance-up meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 51(A), a chance-up meter image I2A, a timer image I2B, and a button image I2E are displayed. The chance-up meter image I2A and timer image I2B are the same as in FIG. The button image I2E is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 51(B) or the timing mismatch display effect shown in FIG. 51(D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 51(B), in the timing coincidence display effect, similar to FIG. An effect is produced to indicate that the timing coincides with the timing at which the timer value in becomes 0 seconds.

A button image I2F is also displayed. The button image I2F is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I2F is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I2E is darkened and/or a state in which the button image I2E is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image I2F, the characters “Press!!” are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 . The button image I2F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image I2B reaches "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(C), a high expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the high-expectation-level chance-up effect, the high-expectation-level chance-up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I2F. The high-expectation chance-up image I2C is an image that suggests that the big-hit expectation is relatively high, similar to FIG. 50(C).

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 51(D), similarly to FIG. An effect is produced to indicate that the timing at which the value becomes 0 seconds does not match. A button image I2F is also displayed. The button image I2F is the same image as in FIG. 51(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(E), a low-expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the low-expectation chance-up presentation, a low-expectation chance-up image I2D is displayed. The low-expectation chance-up image I2D is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, similar to FIG. 51(E).

[Chance up meter effect C]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up meter effect C. FIG.
In the chance-up meter effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), a chance-up meter image I2A, a timer image I2G, and a button image I2E are displayed. The chance up meter image I2A and the button image I2E are the same as those in FIG. The timer image I2G is displayed while the chance-up meter image I2A is being displayed. For example, the timer image I2G is displayed at the start of the chance-up meter effect or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up suggestive image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2G, the timer value is displayed in a count-up manner, and 0 second is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 52(B) or the timing mismatch display effect shown in FIG. 52(D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 52B, in the timing coincidence display effect, when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds), the button image I2H is displayed. The button image I2H is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I2H is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I2E is darkened and/or a state in which the button image I2E is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image I2H, the characters “Press!!” are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 .
In the timing matching display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value and the button image I2H is displayed. matches.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(C), a high expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the high-expectation-level chance-up effect, the high-expectation-level chance-up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I2H. The high-expectation chance-up image I2C is an image that suggests that the big-hit expectation is relatively high, similar to FIG. 50(C).

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 52(D), similarly to FIG. 52(B), the button image I2H is displayed when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds). In the timing mismatch display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value and the button image I2H is displayed. does not match.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(E), a low-expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the low-expectation chance-up presentation, a low-expectation chance-up image I2D is displayed. The low-expectation chance-up image I2D is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, similar to FIG. 50(E).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the chance-up meter effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is configured such that timer display (display of timer image) is executed while the chance-up meter image I2A is being displayed (chance-up meter effect). ing. According to this configuration, a display dealing with two different types of time is provided, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation as time passes. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image reach a predetermined value. A high-expectation chance-up effect or a low-expectation chance-up effect may be executed based on the timing to become. According to this configuration, the high-expectation chance-up effect can be executed based on the displays dealing with two different kinds of times, so that the player can have a greater sense of anticipation due to the progress of these displays. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image reach a predetermined value. When the timing coincides, the high-expectation chance-up effect may be executed. According to this configuration, when the displays dealing with two different types of time are synchronized, the high-expectation chance-up effect can be executed, so that the player can have a greater sense of anticipation due to the progression of these displays. can. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image reach a predetermined value. When the timing does not match, the low-expectation chance-up effect may be executed. According to this configuration, when the displays dealing with two different types of time are not synchronized, the low-expectation chance-up performance can be executed, so that the player has a greater sense of expectation due to the progress of these displays. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value in the timing matching display effect or the timing mismatching display effect, the player is prompted to press the effect button 63. is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a real feeling of having participated in the game, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modification of the chance-up meter effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, chance-up meter display and timer display are performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a chance up meter display and other displays representing the passage of time may be performed. Here, other displays representing the passage of time may be, for example, meters or indicators representing time.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, in the timing coincidence display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing in the timer image The high-expectation chance-up effect is executed when the timer value reaches the predetermined value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timings match, various effects such as a simulated continuous effect, an effect indicating the type of ready-to-win effect, and an announcement suggesting development to a super ready-to-win effect may be executed. In this case, an effect different from these effects may be executed after the timing mismatch display effect. In this case as well, the performance to be executed when the timings match is selected as a performance with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the performance to be executed when the timings do not match.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, in the timing mismatch display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggesting image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing in the timer image Although the low-expectation chance-up effect is executed when the timing at which the timer value reaches the predetermined value does not match, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timings do not match, various effects such as pseudo-continuous effects, effects indicating the type of ready-to-win effect, and advance notice suggesting that the game will develop into a super ready-to-win effect may be executed. In this case, an effect different from these effects may be executed after the timing matching display effect. In this case as well, the performance to be executed when the timings do not match is selected as a performance with a lower degree of expectation than the performance to be performed when the timings match.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the chance-up meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images may be displayed simultaneously. may

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the high-expectation chance-up image I2C and the low-expectation chance-up image I2D are used as the chance-up effect to suggest the chance-up. It is not limited. For example, as a chance increase, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is specifically displayed (such as "Expectation 50%!"), the color is used to indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot, the sound is used to indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot, A predetermined character may be displayed to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect I2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
one of the plurality of types of display is a first period display;
one of the plurality of types of display is a second period display;
one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display;
The first period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the ready-to-win effect display is performed,
The first period display is a display including a cursor display,
The cursor display moves from the start position to the end position through a specific position to represent the start to end of the certain period,
The first period display is a display including a specific position display that notifies the specific position,
The movement of the cursor display from the start position to the specific position represents a period from the start of the certain period to a first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start during the display of the ready-to-win effect display,
The second period display may be performed during the first period display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I2-2]
one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display different from the first effect display;
The second period display is a timer display,
When the second period display is performed during the first period display, the second effect is generated based on the first timing and the second timing when the timer display reaches a predetermined value. may perform display,
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect I2-3]
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, and the first timing coincides with a second timing at which the timer display reaches a predetermined value, the first period display is performed. The second effect display may be executed at the timing of
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect I2-4]
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, if the first timing and the second timing at which the timer display reaches a predetermined value do not match, the The first effect display may be executed at a first timing,
The gaming machine according to mode I2-2 or mode I2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect I2-5]
The first effect display is a display including a first chance-up effect,
The second effect display is a display including a second chance-up effect in which the expectation of a big win is higher than that of the first chance-up effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I2-2 to I2-4, characterized by:
[Aspect I2-6]
The second effect display is a effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the first effect display,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 2 to 5, characterized by:
[Aspect 7]
one of the plurality of types of display is display of an operation unit image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit;
display of the operation unit image is executed when the timer display is executed;
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I2-1 to I2-6, characterized by:

The pending timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. This pending timer effect is during the variable effect of the decorative pattern (for example, at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative pattern, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. can be performed. Note that the pending timer effects A and B are effects that can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the pending timer effect C is an effect that can be executed with the fluctuations.

[Hold timer effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the pending timer effect A. FIG.
In the pending timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), a pending icon I3 and a timer image I3C are displayed. The pending icons I3 are composed of a first pending icon I3B (maximum eight) representing pending and a second pending icon I3A representing the pending. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, only the first reserved icons (maximum four) corresponding to the reserved special figure 1 are shown in the figure among the first reserved icons I3B. Accordingly, the first pending icon I3B in the figure corresponds to the pending image 9A. Hereinafter, the pending timer effect will be shown in the same way.

The timer image I3C is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image I3C shown in FIG. 53A shows 15 seconds as the timer initial value. This timer image I3C is displayed adjacently so as to be associated with the specific first pending icon I3B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this timeout display effect, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one as the hold is shifted, and then the timer value of the timer image I3C is set to 0 seconds. be. It should be noted that the top right of FIG. 53(B) shows that the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, that is, all the decorative designs are changing. In the following, if there is no particular need for such a state, the description will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(C), a pending change display effect is executed. In this pending change display effect, the color of the first pending icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is changed, and a character indicating "heat" is displayed on the pending icon. Thus, it can be suggested that the degree of expectation for a big win has increased in the variable effect corresponding to the first pending icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. That is, the pending change display effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit of the variable effect corresponding to the first pending icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C.

[Hold timer effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the pending timer effect B. FIG.
In the hold timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 54A, a hold icon I3 (a first hold icon I3B and a second hold icon I3A), a timer image I3C, and a button image I3D are displayed. The pending icon I3 and the timer image I3C are the same as in FIG. 53A, so the description is omitted.
The button image I3D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one with the shift of the hold, and then the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes "0" seconds. executed.

Also, in the timeout display effect, the button image I3E is displayed. The button image I3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I3E is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image I3D is darkened and/or a state in which the button image I3D is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image I3E, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(C), a holding expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. In this pending expectation level suggestion effect, the pending expected level suggestion image I3F is displayed so as to correspond to the first pending icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. The pending expectation degree suggesting image I3F suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the variable effect corresponding to the associated first pending icon I3B. The pending expectation degree suggestion image I3F is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

[Hold timer effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the pending timer effect C. FIG.
In the hold timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 55A, a hold icon I3 (a first hold icon I3B and a second hold icon I3A), a timer image I3C, and a button image I3D are displayed. In this case, the timer image I3C is displayed adjacently so as to be associated with the second pending icon I3A. The functions of the pending icon I3, the timer image I3C, and the button image I3D are the same as in FIG. In addition, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are shown in this pending timer effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, the button image I3E is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 54B, and the effect of setting the timer value of the timer image I3C to "0" seconds is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(C), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuation effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image I3G is displayed so as to correspond to the second pending icon I3A associated with the timer image I3C. The pseudo-continuous suggestive image I3G suggests that the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed in the variable effect (the variable effect) corresponding to the associated second pending icon I3A, and the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect. . The pseudo-continuation suggestive image I3G is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and based on the timer value of the timer image I3C, a predetermined effect (hold A change display effect, a pending expectation degree suggesting effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the hold, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in correspondence, and based on the timer value of the timer image I3C, the timer image I3C is associated with the timer image I3C. A predetermined effect (a pending change display effect, a pending expectation degree suggesting effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed for the suspended icon I3. According to this configuration, the interest of the player can be more attracted to the specific hold, and as a result, the amusement can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, the player can quickly recognize the correspondence between the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3, and the player's interest in the specific hold can be increased. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in correspondence, and based on the timer value of the timer image I3C, the timer image I3C is associated with the timer image I3C. An effect (a pending change display effect or a pending expectation degree suggesting effect) of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is executed for the pending icon I3 thus obtained. According to this configuration, since an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is executed for the pending icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C, the player's interest can be further deepened, and as a result, Interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other. A pending change display effect is executed for the icon I3. According to this configuration, the mode of the pending icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C changes, so that the player's interest can be deepened, and as a result, the amusement can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In this case, a predetermined effect (a hold change display effect, a hold expectation degree suggesting effect, or a pseudo continuous effect) is executed for the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C. According to this configuration, until the timer value of the timer image I3C reaches the predetermined value, the player's interest can be attracted to the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C, and as a result, the player's interest can be enhanced. can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, when the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image I3E prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. Then, when the player operates the production button 63, a predetermined production (holding expectation degree suggesting production or pseudo-continuous production) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the effect button 63, improve the rate of participation in the game, and as a result improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the timer image I3C is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the timeout display effect described above can be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the second hold icon I3A, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects such as a pending change display effect as shown in FIG. An up effect may be executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 53 or 54, a timer image I3C is displayed in association with the first hold icon I3B, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a hold change display effect or a hold expectation degree suggestion effect is displayed. is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute other effects such as pseudo-continuous effects and chance-up effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the hold icon I3, and when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (hold change display effect, A pending expectation degree suggesting effect or a pseudo continuous effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed in association with the pending icon I3, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 7.77 seconds), a predetermined effect may be executed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the pending timer effects A to C shown in FIGS. may be displayed at the same time.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pending timer effects A and B shown in FIGS. It is good also as production performed only by . In addition, the pending timer effect C shown in FIG. 55 is an effect that is executed with the variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect that is executed over a plurality of variations may be used.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect I3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
The pending icon includes an icon representing pending and an icon representing the pending,
It is configured to be able to notify the number of pending by the number of display of the pending icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a timer,
A combined effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed, and in the combined effect, the timer display of the first effect and the pending icon are displayed in association with each other, The second effect is performed based on the timer display of the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I3-2]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the pending icon are displayed in association with each other, and based on the timer display, the second effect is displayed for the pending icon associated with the timer display. A performance of
The gaming machine according to aspect I3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect I3-3]
In the combined effect, the timer display of the first effect and the pending icon are displayed adjacent to each other.
[Aspect I3-4] The gaming machine according to aspect I3-1 or aspect I3-2, characterized by
The second production is a production to perform a jackpot expectation degree suggestive display,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, characterized by:
[Aspect I3-5]
The jackpot expectation degree suggestive display is a display that may change the mode of the pending icon,
The gaming machine according to mode I3-4, characterized by:
[Aspect I3-6]
In the combination effect, when the timer display of the first effect reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I3-1 to I3-5, characterized by:
[Aspect I3-7]
Equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
In the combination effect, when the timer display of the first effect reaches a predetermined value, an operation unit image is displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation unit, and the player operates the operation unit. When the second production is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I3-1 to I3-6, characterized by:

56 to 58, the timer ball winning effect will be described below. This ball-out acquisition effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, for example, during a ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). In particular, the timer ball-out acquisition effect can be executed at the final stage of the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect).

[Timer ball acquisition effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the timer ball-out winning effect A. FIG.
In the timer ball-out acquisition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), a big hit notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is shown. In FIG. 56(A), the jackpot pattern arrangement is a series of 7 patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, a timer image I4A and an ally character CRA are displayed. The timer image I4A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image I4A shown in FIG. 56B shows "5 seconds" as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In the scheduled payout ball display performance, when the timer value of the timer image I4A reaches 0 second, the scheduled payout number suggestion image I4B is displayed. The planned payout ball number suggestion image I4B is an image that suggests the jackpot number of balls to be paid out in the jackpot game. In the example of FIG. 56(C), the scheduled payout number suggestion image I4B indicates that 1500 payout balls can be paid out during the jackpot game.

[Timer Ball Acquisition Production B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the timer ball-out winning effect B. FIG.
In the timer ball-out acquisition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), a big hit notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is shown as in FIG. 56(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, the timer image I4A and the teammate character CRA are displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 56(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(C), a button pressing promotion display effect is executed. In this button pressing promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4A becomes "0 seconds" and the button image I4C is displayed. The button image I4C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I4C is an image representing a state as if "PUSH" is displayed in the image and is lit. Adjacent to the button image I4C, the characters "PUSH!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(D), the scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In this scheduled payout ball display effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, the expected payout number suggesting image I4B is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 56(C).

[Timer Ball Acquisition Production C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the timer ball-out winning effect C. As shown in FIG.
In the timer ball-out acquisition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), a big hit notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using decorative patterns is shown in the same manner as in FIG. 56(A).

Next, the timer display effect (large timer initial value) shown in FIG. 58(B) or the timer display effect (small timer initial value) shown in FIG. 58(E) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 58B, in the timer display effect (large timer initial value), a timer image I4D of "15 seconds" with a relatively large timer initial value is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(C), a button pressing promotion display effect is executed. In this button pressing promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4D becomes "0 seconds" and the button image I4C is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 57(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(D), the scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. 57(D), in this payout scheduled ball display presentation, when the player presses the presentation button 63, it is suggested that the number of expected payout balls to be paid out is 1500, which is relatively large. A scheduled payout number suggestion image I4B is displayed.

On the other hand, in the timer display effect (timer initial value small) shown in FIG. 58(E), a timer image I4A with a relatively small timer initial value of "5 seconds" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(F), a button pressing promotion display effect is executed. In this button pressing promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4A becomes "0 seconds" and the button image I4C is displayed, as in FIG. 57(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(G), the scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In this scheduled payout ball display effect, when the player presses the performance button 63, a scheduled payout ball number suggestion image I4E indicating that the number of expected payout balls to be paid out is relatively small, 700 balls, is displayed. is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer ball-out acquisition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and projected payout number suggesting images I4B and I4E are displayed. According to this configuration, the timer display is performed before the scheduled payout number suggestive display is executed, so that the player's interest in the expected payout number of balls to be paid out can be enhanced. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, images I4B and I4E indicating the number of expected payout balls are displayed. be done. According to this configuration, when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the number of balls to be paid out is displayed, so that the player's interest in the number of balls to be paid out can be further enhanced. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and the button image I4C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, images I4B and I4E indicating the number of balls to be paid out are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a real feeling of having participated in the game, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, when the timer display effect is executed in the timer ball acquisition effect C, when the timer image I4D with the relatively large timer initial value is displayed, is larger than when the timer image I4A with a relatively small timer initial value is displayed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the player in the timer display before the image indicating the number of balls to be paid out is displayed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the timer ball-out obtaining effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the button image I4C is displayed after the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D become 0 seconds in the button pressing promotion display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button image I4C may be configured to be displayed when the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D reach a predetermined value (for example, 2 seconds) before reaching 0 seconds.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer output ball acquisition effects shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 are at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, during the variable performance of the decorative symbols, or during the reach performance (super reach performance). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer display effect, the button pressing promotion effect, and the scheduled payout ball display effect among the timer ball-out acquisition effects may be configured to be executed during the jackpot game.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer ball winning effect shown in FIGS. A timer image may be displayed at the same time.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the timer images I4A and I4D are displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer values count down, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the timer images I4A and I4D may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the timeout display effect described above can be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect I4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
one display of the plurality of types of display is a certain display;
The certain display is a display performed when winning a jackpot lottery,
The certain indication may be displayed in the first aspect,
The certain indication may be displayed in a second manner,
The first aspect is an aspect including a timer display,
The second aspect is an aspect including a scheduled payout number indication display that suggests the number of game media to be paid out during a jackpot game based on the jackpot,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the second mode after being displayed in the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I4-2]
The certain display is displayed in the second mode after the timer value of the timer display reaches a first predetermined value in the first mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, characterized by:
[Aspect I4-3]
Equipped with an operation unit that can receive a player's operation and execute a predetermined effect by the player's operation,
The certain display may be displayed in a third aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect including display of an operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit,
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, is displayed in the third mode while being displayed in the first mode, and then the player operates the operation unit. Depending on, it may be displayed in the second mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1 or aspect I4-2, characterized by:
[Aspect I4-4]
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, displayed in the third mode before the timer value in the first mode reaches a second predetermined value, and then is operated by the player. Depending on the operation of the part, it may be displayed in the second mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-3, characterized by:
[Aspect I4-5]
In the first aspect, the initial value of the timer value may be a first value and a second value larger than the first value,
When the certain display is displayed in the first mode and then displayed in the second mode, when the initial value of the timer value in the first mode is the second value reduces the number of game media to be paid out indicated by the indication of the number of expected payouts in the second mode, as compared with the case where the initial value of the timer value in the first mode is the first value; a large value,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes I4-1 to I4-4, characterized by:

The resurrection effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. This resurrection effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols, for example, during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect).

First, before describing the resurrection effect, an example of the losing effect and the big hit effect will be described with reference to FIG.
[Failure production]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the losing effect and the big win effect.
In the losing effect, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win production is a production to be performed during the ready-to-win state in which the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are the same pattern. The ready-to-win production includes a normal reach-to-win production with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big hit and a super ready-to-win production with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit. The super ready-to-win effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal ready-to-win effect. In addition, in this ready-to-win production, the "6" symbol is in the ready-to-win state.

When three of these "6" symbols are used to make a big hit (that is, the big hit pattern array "666"), the game state after the big win game may be in a probability variable state or may be in a non-probability variable state. . Therefore, in the case of the jackpot pattern array "666", the player cannot determine from this pattern array whether the game state after the jackpot game will be the probability variable state or the non-probability variable state. Such a decorative pattern is also called a probability variable indeterminate pattern. In this embodiment, even-numbered symbols correspond to probability-variable and undetermined symbols. Not limited to this, for example, symbols other than the "3" and "7" symbols may be set as probability variable uncertain symbols.
In addition, when a big win is achieved using three "7" symbols (that is, a big win pattern array "777"), it is determined that the game state after the big win game will be a probability variable state. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot pattern array "777", the player can determine from this pattern array that the game state after the jackpot game will be a probability variable state. Such a decorative pattern is also called a probability variation fixed pattern. In the present embodiment, the odd-numbered symbols correspond to odd-numbered symbols. Not limited to this, for example, only "3" and "7" symbols may be set as the probability variation finalized symbols.

This ready-to-win effect includes a ready-to-win effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win and a ready-to-win effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. In the losing effect, the appearance rate of the reach effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the reach effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), a cut-in effect is executed as a chance-up effect. In this cut-in effect, a cut-in image H1A is displayed. The cut-in image H1A is a chance-up image suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low, and represents the words "Chance!". It should be noted that the cut-in effect in the losing effect is not limited to the effect shown in FIG. 59(B), and as shown in FIG. (Chance up effect) may be executed. In this case, in the losing effect, the appearance rate of the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1A with a relatively low expectation for the big win is higher than the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1B with a relatively high expectation for the big win. Is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), a loss notification effect is executed. In this loss notification effect, a loss pattern arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is shown. In FIG. 59(C), in the lost pattern arrangement, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same patterns (6 patterns), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is different patterns (7 patterns).

[Jackpot production]
In the jackpot effect, first, as shown in FIG. 59(D), the ready-to-win effect is executed as in FIG. 59(A). This ready-to-win effect includes a ready-to-win effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win and a ready-to-win effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. In the jackpot performance, the appearance rate of the ready-to-win performance with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the ready-to-win performance with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), a cut-in effect is executed as a chance-up effect. In this cut-in effect, a cut-in image H1B is displayed. The cut-in image H1B is a chance-up image suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively high, and represents the characters "It's hot!". Note that the cut-in effect in the jackpot effect is not limited to the effect shown in FIG. 59(E), and a cut-in effect (chance up effect) may be executed. In this case, in the jackpot effect, the appearance rate of the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1B with a relatively high expectation for the big win is higher than the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1A with a relatively low expectation for the big win. Is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(F), a big hit notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is shown. In FIG. 59(F), the jackpot pattern arrangement is a double pattern in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same pattern (6 patterns). That is, the jackpot pattern array in this case is formed of probability variable and uncertain patterns.

[Resurrection production A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the resurrection effect A. FIG.
In the revival effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the ready-to-win effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 59(A). This ready-to-win effect includes a ready-to-win effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win and a ready-to-win effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. In the revival effect A, the appearance rate of the ready-to-win effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win is higher than that of the ready-to-win effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), similarly to FIG. 59(E), a cut-in effect (chance-up effect) with a relatively high expectation of a big win using the cut-in image H1B is executed. Note that the cut-in effect in the resurrection effect A is not limited to this, and a cut-in effect (chance up effect) with a relatively low expectation of a big win using a cut-in image H1A is executed as shown in FIG. 59(B). may In this case, in the resurrection effect A, a cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1B with a relatively high expectation for a big win appears rather than a cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1A with a relatively low expectation for a big win. rate is high.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), similarly to FIG. 59(C), a failure notification effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), a character movable effect is executed. This accessory movable production is a production in which the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the unfolded position and arranged on the display screen 7a (a position that partially hides the display screen 7a). With this movable performance, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable performance has not ended yet.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), a big-hit notification effect using probability-variable fixed symbols is executed.

[Resurrection production B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the resurrection effect B. FIG.
In the resurrection effect B, the ready-to-win effect of FIG. 61(A), the cut-in effect of FIG. 61(B), and the loss notification effect of FIG. 61(C) are the ready-to-win effect of FIG. 60(C), the cut-in effect is the same as the loss notification effect in FIG.

This ready-to-win effect includes a ready-to-win effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win and a ready-to-win effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. In the resurrection effect B, the appearance rate of the ready-to-win effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win is higher than that of the ready-to-win effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. Also, the cut-in effect in the resurrection effect B is not limited to the effect shown in FIG. 61(B), and as shown in FIG. chance-up effect) may be executed. In this case, in the resurrection effect B, a cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1B with a relatively high expectation for a big win appears rather than a cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1A with a relatively low expectation for a big win. rate is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), a button pressing promotion display effect is executed. The button image H1C is displayed in this button pressing promotion display effect. The button image H1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image H1C is an image that is represented as "PUSH" in the image and represents a state as if it were lit. Adjacent to the button image H1C, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63.
Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), similarly to FIG. 60(E), a big-hit notification effect using the variable probability fixed symbol is executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the resurrection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, there are cases in which a losing effect is executed, a big win effect is executed, and a revival effect is executed. According to this configuration, even when the loss notification effect is executed, there is a possibility of the resurrection effect, so that the player can be given hope, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved. .

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 61, in the resurrection effects A and B, in the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win state is indicated using probability variable and indeterminate symbols, and the big hit notification is given after the loss notification effect. In the production, the jackpot pattern arrangement is shown using the probability variable fixed pattern. According to this configuration, in the case of the resurrection effect, the transition to the variable probability state is confirmed, so when the resurrection effect is realized, the player can be given great joy. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when the ready-to-win effect is executed in the resurrection effect, the expectation for the big win is relatively higher than the ready-to-win effect for which the expectation for the big win is relatively low. Reach production has a higher appearance rate. According to this configuration, when a ready-to-win effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win appears, the possibility of the resurrection effect increases, so the player can be excited and watch the transition of the effect after the ready-to-win effect. Become. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when the cut-in effect (chance-up effect) is executed in the resurrection effect, the degree of expectation for a relatively big win using the cut-in image H1A is high. The appearance rate of the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1B with a relatively high degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that of the low cut-in effect. According to this configuration, when the cut-in image H1B with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win appears, the possibility of the resurrection effect increases, so the player is thrilled to see the transition of the effect after the cut-in effect. I will watch over you. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the resurrection effect A, the big hit notification effect is executed after the loss notification effect is executed and the accessory movable effect is executed. According to this configuration, even when the loss notification effect is executed, if the character movable effect is executed, the game may shift to the big win notification effect. It will strongly desire the realization of movable production. Therefore, the player will be overwhelmed with joy when the character object movable presentation is realized. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the resurrection effect A, the role object movement effect is executed after the loss notification effect, and the board movable body 15 is on the front side of the display screen 7a, and the player It is arranged at a position overlapping the display screen 7a when viewed from above. According to this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the failure notification effect has been canceled by the accessory movable effect, and the player can be given joy. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the resurrection effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, in the losing effect, the appearance rate of the ready-to-win effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win is higher than that of the ready-to-win effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a ready-to-win performance with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win may have a higher appearance rate than a ready-to-win performance with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. In addition, in the losing effect, the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1A with a relatively low expectation for a big win has a higher appearance rate than the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1B with a relatively high expectation for a big win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1B with a relatively high expectation for the big win is the one using the cut-in image H1A. The appearance rate may be higher than the cut-in effect with a low .

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, in the jackpot performance, the appearance rate of the ready-to-win performance with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win is higher than that of the ready-to-win performance with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a ready-to-win performance with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win may have a higher appearance rate than a ready-to-win performance with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win. In addition, in the jackpot effect, the appearance rate of the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1B with a relatively high degree of expectation for the big win is higher than the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1A with a relatively low degree of expectation for the big win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1A with a relatively low expectation for a big win is more likely to have a relatively low expectation for a big win using the cut-in image H1B. The appearance rate may be higher than the cut-in effect with a high .

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in the resurrection effect, the appearance rate of the ready-to-win effect with a relatively high expectation of a big win is higher than the ready-to-win effect with a relatively low expectation of a big win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the appearance rate of reach production with relatively low expectation of big hit is higher than reach production with relatively high expectation of big hit. good too. In addition, in the resurrection effect, the appearance rate of the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1B with relatively high expectation for big win is higher than the cut-in effect using cut-in image H1A with relatively low expectation for big win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1A with a relatively low expectation for the big win is the one using the cut-in image H1B. The appearance rate may be higher than the cut-in effect with a high .

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 61, in the resurrection effect, the ready-to-win state is formed using the probability variable and indeterminate symbols in the ready-to-win effect. When executed, the configuration is such that the jackpot pattern array is shown using the variable probability fixed pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a ready-to-win state using the probability variable fixed pattern in the reach production, after the loss notification production, when the jackpot notification production is executed, it is possible to use the probability variable fixed pattern again to show the jackpot pattern arrangement. Well, after forming the reach state using the probability variation indeterminate pattern in the reach production, through the loss notification production, when the jackpot notification production is executed, again using the probability variation indefinite pattern The jackpot pattern arrangement is shown. It may be configured to be

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, a cut-in effect is executed as a chance-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , an effect in which the color of a predetermined area (ally character CRA, etc.) changes, an effect in which a predetermined rare character appears, or an effect in which a predetermined effect (game, etc.) succeeds may be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect H1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
One of the plurality of display effects is a certain effect,
The certain production may be executed in the first mode,
The certain production may be executed in the second mode,
The certain production may be executed in the third mode,
The certain production may be executed in the fourth mode,
The first aspect is an aspect including reach production,
The second aspect is an aspect including a chance-up effect,
The third aspect is an aspect including a losing effect of displaying a losing pattern array,
The fourth aspect is an aspect including a winning effect for displaying a jackpot pattern array,
The certain effect is a effect that may be performed in one pattern out of a plurality of patterns including a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern,
In the certain effect, as the first pattern, the effect is executed in the second mode after the effect is executed in the first mode, and the effect is performed in the second mode after the effect is performed in the second mode. It is a production that may be executed in the mode of 3,
In the certain effect, as the second pattern, the effect is executed in the second mode after the effect is executed in the first mode, and the effect is executed in the second mode after the effect is executed in the second mode. It is a production that may be executed in the mode of 4,
In the certain effect, as the third pattern, the effect is executed in the second mode after the effect is executed in the first mode, and the effect is performed in the second mode after the effect is performed in the second mode. An effect in which the effect is executed in the third mode, and the effect in the fourth mode may be performed after the effect is performed in the third mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-2]
In the ready-to-win performance of the first mode, the ready-to-win state is indicated by using a first pattern that does not suggest the presence or absence of transition to a game state advantageous to the player, and the jackpot displayed in the fourth mode. The symbol array is indicated using a second symbol that suggests a transition to a game state advantageous to the player,
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-1, characterized by:
[Aspect H1-3]
In the ready-to-reach production of the first mode, a first ready-to-reach production may be executed,
In the ready-to-win production of the first mode, a second ready-to-win production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the first ready-to-win production may be executed,
When the certain effect is performed in the third pattern, when the effect is executed in the first mode, the second ready-to-win effect is executed more often than the first ready-to-reach effect. to be
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-1 or aspect H1-2, characterized by:
[Aspect H1-4]
The chance-up effect of the second aspect may be executed as a first chance-up effect,
The second chance-up effect of the second mode may be a second chance-up effect with a higher expectation for a big win than the first chance-up effect,
In the case where the certain production is performed in the third pattern, when the production is executed in the second mode, the second chance-up production is higher than the first chance-up production. executed a lot,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes H1-1 to H1-3, characterized by:
[Aspect H1-5]
Equipped with movable accessories,
In the case where the certain production is performed in the third pattern, the winning production of the fourth mode is executed in the third mode, and after the movable accessory moves to a predetermined position. executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes H1-1 to H1-4, characterized by:
[Aspect H1-6]
The predetermined position is on the front side of the display means and is a position overlapping the display means as seen from the player.
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-5, characterized by:

The result rendering will be described below with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. This result effect can be executed, for example, during a jackpot game.

[Result A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the result effect A. FIG.
In the result production A, first, when the jackpot game starts, the variable probability shift challenge production is executed as shown in FIG. 62(A). In this variable probability transition challenge performance, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight to challenge the game state after the big win game to shift to the variable probability state with time reduction. It is a production that shows. In addition, the variable probability state with time saving is a state of time reduction and a variable probability state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), probability variation transition failure effect 1 is executed. This variable probability transition failure presentation 1 is a presentation showing a state in which the ally character CRA is blown away by the enemy character CRB and loses the battle. That is, this probability variable transition failure performance 1 is a performance suggesting that the game state after the jackpot game does not shift to the probability variable state with time reduction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), probability variation transition failure effect 2 is executed. This variable probability transition failure presentation 2 is a presentation emphasizing that the ally character CRA has lost the battle with the enemy character CRB. That is, this probability variable transition failure effect 2 is an effect suggesting that the game state after the jackpot game does not shift to the probability variable state with time reduction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), a result screen display effect is executed. In this result screen display effect, a continuation number suggesting image H2A and a winning ball number suggesting image H2B are displayed. The number-of-continuations suggesting image H2A is an image that suggests the number of consecutive big wins (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of continuations) during the time-saving state. The obtained ball number indication image H2B is an image indicating the number of balls paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the obtained ball number). The continuation number suggesting image H2A in FIG. 62(D) indicates that the number of continuations is "3", and the obtained ball number indicating image H2B indicates that the obtained number of balls is "2700". When the result screen display performance is executed and the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state with time reduction. The non-probability variable state with time reduction is a state of time reduction and is a state that is a non-probability variable state.

[Result B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the result effect B. FIG.
In the result production B, first, when the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the variable probability shift challenge production similar to that in FIG. 62(A) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), probability variation transition success effect 1 is executed. This variable probability transition success effect 1 is a effect showing a state in which the ally character CRA flings over the enemy character CRB and wins the battle. That is, this variable probability shift success effect 1 is a effect suggesting that the game state after the jackpot game shifts to a variable probability state with time reduction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), probability variation transition success effect 2 is executed. This variable probability transition success effect 2 is a effect emphasizing that the ally character CRA has won the battle against the enemy character CRB. That is, this probability variable transition success effect 2 is an effect suggesting that the game state after the jackpot game shifts to a probability variable state with time reduction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a result screen display effect is executed. In this result screen display effect, a continuation number suggesting image H2A and a winning ball number suggesting image H2B are displayed. The continuation number suggesting image H2A in FIG. 63(D) indicates that the number of continuations is "5", and the number of obtained balls indicating image H2B indicates that the number of obtained balls is "4500". When the result screen display performance is executed and the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to a probability variable state with reduced working hours.

[Result production C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the result effect C. FIG.
In the result production C, first, when the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the probability variation transition challenge production similar to that in FIG. 62(A) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), probability variation transition failure effect 1 similar to that in FIG. 62(B) is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), probability variation transition failure effect 2 similar to that in FIG. 62(C) is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a result screen display effect similar to that shown in FIG. 62(D) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a character movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable effect, the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the unfolded position and placed on the display screen 7a (a position that partially hides the display screen 7a).
Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), the probability variation transition suggestion effect is executed. In this probability variation transition suggestion production, the probability variation transition suggestion image H2C is displayed. The probability change transition suggesting image H2C is an effect suggesting that the game state after the jackpot game will shift to the probability change state, and is represented by the characters "It will continue!". When the result screen display effect is executed and the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to a probability variable state with time saving.

Incidentally, in the result effects A and C, a chance up display can be executed in the result screen display effect. As this chance-up display, for example, the following display can be performed.
(1) The color of the number of continuation characters in the continuation number suggesting image H2A may be a first color (eg, blue) and a second color (eg, red). In this case, when the character color of the number of continuations in the continuation number suggesting image H2A is the second color, the degree of expectation for the development of the character object movable effect and the probability variation transition suggesting effect is higher than the case of the first color. It is set so that (expectation of transition to definite variable state) is high. In other words, when the number of continuation characters in the continuation number suggesting image H2A is the second color, the possibility that the result effect C is selected is higher than when it is the first color. is set to
(2) The character color of the number of acquired balls in the acquired ball number suggestion image H2B may be a first color (eg, blue) and a second color (eg, red). In this case, when the character color of the number of acquired balls is the second color, the degree of expectation for development (transition to the expectations) are set to be high. In other words, when the character color of the number of obtained balls in the obtained ball number indication image H2B is the second color, the possibility that the result effect C is selected is higher than when it is the first color. is set to be
(3) The pattern of the background color of the result screen (display screen 7a) may be the first pattern (eg striped pattern) or the second pattern (tiger pattern). In this case, when the pattern of the background color of the result screen (display screen 7a) is the second pattern, the degree of expectation for the development of the character object movable effect and the probability variation transition suggestive effect is higher than the case of the first pattern. It is set so that (expectation of transition to definite variable state) is high. In other words, when the pattern of the background color of the result screen (display screen 7a) is the second pattern, the possibility that the result effect C is selected is higher than when the pattern is the first pattern. is set to
(4) On the result screen (display screen 7a), there are cases where a first character (eg, an enemy character) appears and where a second character (eg, an ally character) appears. In this case, in the result screen (display screen 7a), when the second character appears, the degree of development expectation ( It is set so that the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change state) is high. In other words, on the result screen (display screen 7a), when the second character appears, the possibility that the result effect C is selected is higher than when the first character appears. set.
In addition, in the above-mentioned chance-up display, the color of the number of continuations in the continuation number suggesting image H2A, the color of the acquired balls in the acquired ball number suggesting image H2B, the background color of the result screen, and the type of character appearing in the result screen. , a first chance-up display and a second chance-up display are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of chance-up displays may be executed in addition to these chance-up displays.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the result presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as in the result production A shown in FIG. Also called a pattern), and a pattern in which a probability variable transition failure effect is executed, a result screen display effect is executed, and then a probability variable transition suggestive effect is executed to end the jackpot game like the result effect C shown in FIG. 64 ( In the following, it is also called probability variation transition resurrection effect pattern). According to this configuration, the player who has experienced the probability variable transition resurrection effect pattern can expect appearance of the probability variable transition suggestive effect until the end of the jackpot game even when the probability variable transition failure effect is executed. , the player can be given a thrilling feeling until the end of the jackpot game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, in the result presentations A to C, in the result screen display presentation, the number of continuations, which is the number of consecutive big wins during the time saving state, is displayed. According to this configuration, the display of the number of continuations can attract the player's attention to the result screen, and, like the result effect C, after the result screen display effect, the character movement effect and the probability change transition suggesting effect are performed. When executed, it can give the player a great sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, in the result effects A to C, the number of winning balls, which is the number of balls paid out in the jackpot game, is displayed in the result screen display effect. be. According to this configuration, the player's attention can be attracted to the result screen by displaying the number of obtained balls, and after the result screen display effect as in the result effect C, the character movable effect and the probability change transition suggesting effect are performed. is executed, it is possible to give the player a great sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the result screen display effect in the result effects A and C of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the color of the continuation number suggesting image H2A, the color of the winning ball number suggesting image H2B, the background color of the result screen, and appearing on the result screen. In the character, the first chance-up display and the expectation that the first chance-up display will develop into a movable role production and a probability-variable transition suggestive production are higher than the first chance-up display (that is, the expectation of transition to a probability-variable state with time reduction is high ) second chance-up display and one of the second chance-up display can be executed. According to this configuration, even when the variable probability transition failure effect is executed in the result effect, the player can be made to pay attention to the result screen display effect, and the second chance can be obtained in the result screen display effect. When the close-up display is executed, it is possible to impart a great sense of expectation to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the result screen display effects in the result effects A and C of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the colors of the characters in the number-of-continuations suggesting image H2A or the number-of-gotten-balls suggesting image H2B are the first color and the second color. There is, and the character color is higher in the case of the second color than in the case of the first color. is set to be high. In other words, the setting is such that the possibility that the result effect C is selected is higher when the character color is the second color than when the character color is the first color. According to this configuration, even when the variable probability transition failure effect is executed in the result effect, the player can be made to pay attention to the color of the characters displayed on the result screen in the result screen display effect, When the character color of the number-of-continued-suggestion image H2A or the number-of-gotten-balls suggestion image H2B on the result screen is the second color, it is possible to give the player a great sense of anticipation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the result production will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, in the result performances A to C, performance is executed as to whether or not the game state after the jackpot game shifts to the variable probability state with time reduction, and the result is displayed. In the production A, after the result screen display production, it shifts to a non-variable state with time reduction, and in the result productions B and C, it is configured to shift to a variable probability state with time reduction after the result screen display production. It is not limited to this. For example, in the result productions A to C, an production is executed as to whether the game state after the jackpot game shifts to a probability variable state with time reduction or to a non-probability variable state without time reduction, and in the result production A, a result screen is displayed. After the performance, it may be shifted to the non-probability variable state without time reduction, and in the result performances B and C, it may be configured to shift to the probability variable state with time reduction after the result screen display performance.
Also, the game machine 1 is a so-called VST machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a one-type two-type mixed machine. In this case, in the result productions A to C, a production is executed as to whether the game state after the jackpot game shifts to a time saving state or a non-time saving state, and in the result production A, after the result screen display production, It may be configured to shift to the non-time-saving state, and in the result productions B and C, shift to the time-saving state after the result screen display production.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the chance up display is not executed in the result screen display effect in the result effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the result In the result screen display effect of the effect B, the chance up display may be executed. In this case, since the transition to the probability variable state has already been notified by the probability variable transition success effect at the time of the result screen display effect, the chance up display may suggest a predetermined degree of expectation, for example, there is a big win in the hold. You may suggest the degree of expectation (degree of expectation of consecutive changs on hold) representing whether or not.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 64, in the result effects A and C, the chance up display is executed in the result screen display effect. The configuration is not limited to this, and in the result effects A and C, the chance up display may be executed in the effect before the result screen display effect. For example, in the result productions A and C, the chance-up display may be executed in any of the probability variable transition challenge production, the probability variable transition failure production, or the probability variable transition success production.
[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, in the result production B, the variable-probability transition success production may be used to execute the movable character production. According to this configuration, since the role object movable effect is executed also in the result production C, it is possible to impress the player that the role object movable effect is shifted to the probability variable state, and the player can make the role object movable effect. You can feel great excitement about the production. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect H2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
one of the plurality of types of display is a certain display during a jackpot game;
The certain indication may be displayed in the first aspect,
The certain indication may be displayed in a second manner,
The certain display may be displayed in a third aspect,
The first aspect is an aspect including a result display suggesting that the jackpot game is over,
The second mode is a mode including a display suggesting that the game state after the jackpot game is a first game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player,
The third mode is a mode including a display suggesting that the game state after the jackpot game is a second game state that is relatively advantageous for the player,
the certain display is a display performed in one of a plurality of patterns including a first pattern and a second pattern;
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the first mode after being displayed in the second mode as the first pattern,
The certain display, as the second pattern, may be displayed in the first mode after being displayed in the second mode, and may be displayed in the third mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H2-2]
The result display includes a display showing the number of times the jackpot was won during a predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to aspect H2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect H2-3]
The result display includes a display showing jackpot output information,
The gaming machine according to aspect H2-1 or aspect H2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect H2-4]
The result display includes a plurality of chance-up displays including a first chance-up display and a second chance-up display with a higher expectation of transition to the second gaming state than the first chance-up display. is a display that may include a chance-up display of one of
The gaming machine according to any one of modes H2-1 to H2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect H2-5]
The first chance-up display and the second chance-up are indicated by different colors, thereby suggesting a chance-up.
The game machine according to mode H2-4, characterized by:

The multiple index effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. This multi-index effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols, for example, during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect).

[Multiple index effect A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the multi-index effect A. FIG.
In the multi-index effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the first panel display effect is executed. In this first panel display effect, the first panel PN1 is shown on the display screen 7a. On the first panel PN1, a teammate character CRA, a crystal image G1A, an expectation suggesting image G1B, and a super ready-to-win preview image G1C are displayed as indices indicating the degree of expectation for a big win.

The ally character CRA can take any one of state A, state B, and state C. FIG. As shown in the index expectation level table of FIG. 65, when the teammate character CRA is in state C, the suggestion is that the expectation level of the big win is the highest, and when the friend character CRA is in the state B, the suggestion is that the expectation level of the big win is the second highest. In the case of C, it is a suggestion that the degree of expectation for a big hit is the third highest. In the first panel display effect shown in FIG. 65(A), the teammate character CRA is in the state B, suggesting the second highest expectation for a big win among the states of the teammate character CRA.

The crystal image G1A can be any one of blue, green, and red. As shown in the index expectation degree table of FIG. 65, the crystal image G1A is red, which suggests the highest degree of expectation for a big win, and when it is green, it indicates the second highest degree of expectation for a big win, and when it is blue. is the third highest expectation for the jackpot. In the first panel display effect shown in FIG. 65(A), the crystal image G1A is in a red color state, suggesting the highest degree of expectation for a big win among the colors of the crystal image G1A.

The expectation level suggesting image G1B can have any one of three, four, or five stars. As shown in the index expectation table of FIG. 65, the number of stars in the expectation suggestion image G1B is the first indication that the expectation of the jackpot is the highest when the number of stars is 5, and the expectation of the jackpot is the second highest when the number of stars is 4. It is a suggestion, and the three cases are suggestions with the third highest expectation for a big hit. In the first panel display effect shown in FIG. 65(A), the number of stars in the expectation suggestive image G1B is in three states, suggesting the third highest jackpot expectation in the expectation suggestive image G1B. there is

In the super reach preview image G1C, the super reach effects that will be developed in the future are super reach effect A (described as SPA in the index expectation table in the figure), super reach effect B (described as SPB in the index expectation table in the figure), Any one of super reach performance C (denoted as SPC in the index expectation table of the figure) can be predicted. As shown in the index expectation degree table of FIG. 65, the super ready-to-win notice image G1C is the first indication of the high jackpot expectation when it announces the super ready-to-win effect C, and the second indication when it announces the super ready-to-win effect B. 3, the prediction of the expectation for the big win is high, and the case where the super ready-to-win production A is announced is the third suggestion for the expectation of the big win. In the first panel display effect shown in FIG. 65(A), the super ready-to-win preview image G1C is in a state of foreshadowing the super ready-to-win effect B, suggesting the second highest jackpot expectation among the super ready-to-win preview images G1C. ing.

That is, in the first panel display effect of FIG. 65(A), the first panel PN1 is displayed, and in the first panel PN1, the second highest expectation for the big win among the states of the teammate character CRA is suggested. B's friend character CRA is displayed, a red crystal image G1A suggesting the highest degree of expectation for the big win among the colors of the crystal image G1A is displayed, and the third highest degree of expectation for the jackpot among the images G1B suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed. An expectation degree suggesting image G1B with three stars suggesting an expectation degree is displayed, and a super reach prediction image G1C predicting a super reach effect B suggesting the second highest jackpot expectation degree among the super reach prediction images G1C. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the second panel display effect is executed. In this second panel display effect, the second panel PN2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the second panel PN2, a teammate character CRA, a crystal image G1A, an expectation suggesting image G1B, and a super ready-to-win preview image G1C are displayed as indicators indicating the degree of expectation for a big win.

In the second panel PN2, the friend character CRA in state C, which indicates the highest expected degree of big win among the states of the friendly character CRA, is displayed, and the third highest expected degree of big win among the colors of the crystal image G1A is displayed. is displayed, an expectation suggestion image G1B with four stars suggesting the second highest jackpot expectation among the expectation suggestion images G1B is displayed, and a super reach preview image G1C is displayed. Among them, a super ready-to-win preview image G1C for notifying a super ready-to-win effect A that suggests the third highest degree of expectation for a big win is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the third panel display effect is executed. In this third panel display effect, the third panel PN3 is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the third panel PN3, a teammate character CRA, a crystal image G1A, an expectation suggesting image G1B, and a super ready-to-win preview image G1C are displayed as indices indicating the degree of expectation for a big win.

In the third panel PN3, the friend character CRA in the state A indicating the third highest expectation for the big win among the states of the friend character CRA is displayed, and the second highest expectation for the big win among the colors of the crystal image G1A. is displayed, an expectation suggestion image G1B with five stars suggesting the highest jackpot expectation among the expectation suggestion images G1B is displayed, and a super reach preview image G1C is displayed. Among them, a super ready-to-win preview image G1C for notifying a super ready-to-win effect C suggesting the highest degree of expectation for a big win is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), a panel selection effect is executed. In this panel selection effect, a first panel display area AR1, a second panel display area AR2, and a third panel display area AR3 are displayed. A first panel PN1 is displayed in the first panel display area AR1, a second panel PN2 is displayed in the second panel display area AR2, and a third panel PN3 is displayed in the third panel display area AR3. be. In the panel selection effect, the background colors of the first panel display area AR1 to the third panel display area AR3 are sequentially changed, and finally one panel display area (that is, the first panel PN1 to the third panel PN3 , one of the panels) is executed. In FIG. 65(D), the first panel display area AR1 is cross hatched, indicating that the first panel display area AR1 has been selected. That is, FIG. 65(D) shows that the first panel PN1 has been selected.

In the panel selection effect, when the first panel display area AR1 (first panel PN1) is selected, it develops into a super ready-to-win effect B, which is a super ready-to-win effect represented by a super ready-to-win preview image G1C. When the second panel display area AR2 (the second panel PN2) is selected, it develops into the super ready-to-win effect A, which is the super ready-to-win effect represented by the super ready-to-win preview image G1C. When the third panel display area AR3 (the third panel PN3) is selected, it develops into the super ready-to-win effect C, which is the super ready-to-win effect represented by the super ready-to-win preview image G1C. Note that the super reach effect is included in the reach effect.

[Multiple index effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the multi-index effect B. FIG.
In the multiple index effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the first panel display effect is executed. In this first panel display effect, the first panel PN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the first panel PN1, a teammate character CRA, a crystal image G1A, an expectation suggesting image G1B, and a super ready-to-win preview image G1C are displayed as indices indicating the degree of expectation for a big win. The degree of expectation for a big win according to the state of these indices is the same as in the multi-index effect A, so the explanation is omitted.

That is, in the first panel display effect of FIG. 66(A), the first panel PN1 is displayed, and in the first panel PN1, among the states of the teammate character CRA, the third highest expectation for a big win is suggested. A's ally character CRA is displayed, a blue crystal image G1A indicating the third highest degree of expectation for a big win among the colors of the crystal image G1A is displayed, and the third highest degree of expectation for the jackpot among the images G1B indicating the degree of expectation is displayed. An expectation degree suggesting image G1B with three stars suggesting an expectation degree is displayed, and a super reach prediction image G1C predicting a super reach performance A suggesting the third highest jackpot expectation degree among the super reach prediction images G1C. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the second panel display effect is executed. In this second panel display effect, the second panel PN2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the second panel PN2, a teammate character CRA, a crystal image G1A, an expectation suggesting image G1B, and a super ready-to-win preview image G1C are displayed as indicators indicating the degree of expectation for a big win.

In the second panel PN2, the friend character CRA in the state B indicating the second highest expectation for the big win among the states of the friend character CRA is displayed, and the second highest expectation for the big win is displayed among the colors of the crystal image G1A. is displayed, an expectation suggestion image G1B with four stars suggesting the second highest jackpot expectation among the expectation suggestion images G1B is displayed, and a super reach preview image G1C is displayed. Among them, a super ready-to-win preview image G1C for notifying a super ready-to-win effect B suggesting the second highest degree of expectation for a big win is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the third panel display effect is executed. In this third panel display effect, the third panel PN3 is displayed on the display screen 7a. On the third panel PN3, a teammate character CRA, a crystal image G1A, an expectation suggesting image G1B, and a super ready-to-win preview image G1C are displayed as indices indicating the degree of expectation for a big win.

In the third panel PN3, the friend character CRA in the state C indicating the highest expected degree of big win among the states of the friendly character CRA is displayed, and the highest expected degree of big win among the colors of the crystal image G1A is displayed. A red crystal image G1A suggesting is displayed, an expectation suggesting image G1B with five stars suggesting the highest jackpot expectation in the expectation suggesting image G1B is displayed, and a super reach preview image G1C is displayed. Among them, a super ready-to-win preview image G1C for notifying a super ready-to-win effect C suggesting the highest degree of expectation for a big win is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), a panel selection effect similar to that in FIG. 65(D) is executed. In this panel selection effect, a first panel display area AR1, a second panel display area AR2, and a third panel display area AR3 are displayed. A first panel PN1 is displayed in the first panel display area AR1, a second panel PN2 is displayed in the second panel display area AR2, and a third panel PN3 is displayed in the third panel display area AR3. be. In the panel selection effect, the background colors of the first panel display area AR1 to the third panel display area AR3 are sequentially changed, and finally one panel display area (that is, the first panel PN1 to the third panel PN3 , one of the panels) is executed. In FIG. 66(D), the first panel display area AR1 is cross hatched, indicating that the first panel display area AR1 has been selected. That is, FIG. 66(D) shows that the first panel PN1 has been selected.

In the panel selection effect, when the first panel display area AR1 (first panel PN1) is selected, it develops into a super ready-to-win effect A, which is a super ready-to-win effect represented by a super ready-to-win preview image G1C. When the second panel display area AR2 (the second panel PN2) is selected, it develops into the super ready-to-win effect B, which is the super ready-to-win effect represented by the super ready-to-win preview image G1C. When the third panel display area AR3 (the third panel PN3) is selected, it develops into the super ready-to-win effect C, which is the super ready-to-win effect represented by the super ready-to-win preview image G1C.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the multi-index presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the multi-index effects A and B, each panel display effect uses a friend character CRA, a crystal image G1A, a crystal image G1A, a An expectation level suggesting image G1B and a super reach preview image G1C are displayed. In each of panels PN1 to PN3, each of these indicators is shown with a different jackpot expectation. For example, on the first panel PN1 in the multi-index effect A, the friend character CRA in the state B indicating the second highest expectation for the big win among the states of the friend character CRA is displayed, and on the second panel PN2, the friend character CRA is displayed. In the state of CRA, the friend character CRA in the state C suggesting the highest degree of expectation for a big win is displayed, and in the first panel PN1 in the multi-index effect A, the color of the crystal image G1A is the first. A red crystal image G1A suggesting a high jackpot expectation is displayed on the second panel PN2, and a blue crystal image G1A suggesting the third highest jackpot expectation among the crystal image G1A colors is displayed on the second panel PN2. be done. In the panel selection effect, one panel is selected from the first panel PN1 to the third panel PN3. According to this configuration, a plurality of indicators suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win are displayed, and since these indicators are displayed with different degrees of expectation for a big win on each of the panels PN1 to PN3, the player can expect the degree of expectation of each index. You can enjoy it with joy and sorrow. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, in the multi-index effect B, in each panel display effect, the player character CRA, the crystal image G1A, and the expectation suggesting image G1B are displayed as indices indicating the degree of expectation for the big win. , the super reach preview image G1C is displayed. Each indicator of the third panel PN3 is suggested to have a higher jackpot expectation than each corresponding indicator of the second panel PN2, and each indicator of the second panel PN2 is more likely than each corresponding indicator of the first panel PN1. Suggestions with high expectations for jackpot are also executed. For example, in the third panel PN3 in the multi-index effect B, the friend character CRA in the state C indicating the highest expected degree of big win among the states of the friend character CRA is displayed, and the color of the crystal image G1A is displayed. In the second panel PN2, a red crystal image G1A suggesting the highest degree of expectation for a big win is displayed, and in the second panel PN2, a state B indicating the second highest degree of expectation for a big win among the states of the ally character CRA is displayed. An ally character CRA is displayed, and a green crystal image G1A is displayed, which suggests the second highest degree of expectation for a big win among the colors of the crystal image G1A. According to this configuration, in the panel selection effect, the player can easily rank the panels that the player wishes to select (the player prefers the third panel PN3 first, and the second panel PN2 second). The first panel PN1 can be desired third), and the panel selection effect can be enjoyed while pounding. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the multiple index effects A and B, after the panel selection effect, a super ready-to-win preview image G1C is displayed on the panel selected in the panel selection effect. It is a configuration in which the super reach effect represented by is executed. According to this configuration, the super ready-to-win effect represented by the super ready-to-win preview image G1C displayed on the panel selected in the panel selection effect is the super ready-to-win effect C with the highest degree of expectation for big win among the super ready-to-win preview images G1C. If there is, the super ready-to-win effect C is executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved without disappointing the player's expectations.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the multiple index effects A and B, the panel selection effect is included in the ready-to-win effect, and the effect after the panel selection effect is the super ready-to-win effect. can be included. According to this configuration, the panel selection effect and the effect after the panel selection effect can be provided with consistency (or storytelling), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the multi-index effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the multiple index effects A and B, in the panel selection effect, any one of the first panel PN1 to the third panel PN3 is displayed. , the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the panel selection effect, the first panel PN1 to the third panel PN3 may be horizontally or vertically scrolled on the display screen 7a, and then one panel may be stopped and displayed to select the panel. good.
In the panel selection effect, the first panel PN1 to the third panel PN3 may be displayed in order on the display screen 7a, and then one panel may be stopped and displayed to select the panel. In this case, in particular, while one panel is being displayed, other panels may not be displayed. For example, when the first panel PN1 is displayed, the second panel PN2 and the third panel PN3 may not be displayed. According to this configuration, the player can firmly check each panel, and the player can enjoy whether or not the game stops at the desired panel. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the multiple index effects A and B, after the panel selection effect, in the super ready-to-win preview image G1C corresponding to the panel selected in the panel selection effect, It is a configuration in which the represented super reach production is executed. For example, in the multi-index effect A, when the first panel PN1 is selected in the panel selection effect, after the panel selection effect, the super ready-to-win effect, which is the super ready-to-win effect shown in the super ready-to-win preview image G1C on the first panel PN1, is displayed. A ready-to-win effect B is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the panel selection effect, another super reach effect different from the super reach effect represented in the super reach preview image G1C corresponding to the panel selected in the panel selection effect (for example, a super reach effect in another panel) A configuration in which a super reach effect represented in G1C) is executed may be used. Also, after the panel selection effect, an effect unrelated to the super ready-to-win effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead continuous effect that can be performed with multiple variations) may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, in the multi-index effect B, in each panel display effect, the player character CRA, the crystal image G1A, and the expectation suggesting image G1B are displayed as indices indicating the degree of expectation for the big win. , a super reach preview image G1C is displayed, each index on the third panel PN3 is suggested to have a higher expectation for a big win than each corresponding index on the second panel PN2, and each index on the second panel PN2 is: It is a configuration in which a suggestion with a higher jackpot expectation than each corresponding index on the first panel PN1 is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among the four indicators of the third panel PN3, one indicator may be suggested to have a lower jackpot expectation than the corresponding indicator of the second panel PN2. A suggestion may be made that one of the indicators has a lower jackpot expectation than the corresponding indicator on the first panel PN1. In addition, of the four indicators on the third panel PN3, half of the two indicators may be suggested to have lower jackpot expectations than the corresponding indicators on the second panel PN2, or the second panel PN3 Of the four indicators of , half of the two indicators may be suggested to have a lower jackpot expectation than the corresponding indicators of the first panel PN1.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the multiple-index effects A and B, the multiple-index effects are effects using a timer and/or using a meter, which will be described above or later. The effect may be executed when the timer value and/or the meter value reach a predetermined value (eg, 0 or maximum (MAX)). Also, after the panel selection effect, such an effect using a timer or meter may be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display may be displayed in a first mode,
One of the plurality of types of display may be displayed in a second mode,
The display of the first aspect includes a display representing a first indicator and a display representing a second indicator,
The display of the second aspect includes a display representing a first indicator and a display representing a second indicator,
The first index is an index that represents the degree of expectation of a big win in a first format,
The second index is an index representing the degree of expectation of a big win in a second format different from the first format,
The first indicator of the first aspect is expressed so as to have a different degree of expectation for a big win than the first indicator of the second aspect, and the second indicator of the first aspect is , The second indicator of the second aspect is expressed so that the expected degree of jackpot is different,
An effect is performed in which one mode of display is selected from a plurality of modes of display including the first mode of display and the second mode of display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G1-2]
The first indicator of the first aspect represents a higher expected jackpot than the first indicator of the second aspect, and the second indicator of the first aspect is the The expected degree of big hit is expressed higher than the second indicator of the second aspect,
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1, characterized by:
[Aspect G1-3]
When selecting one mode of display from a plurality of modes of display including the first mode of display and the second mode of display, when the first mode of display is performed , the second mode may not be displayed, and when the second mode is displayed, the first mode may not be displayed,
The gaming machine according to mode G1-1 or mode G1-2, characterized by:
[Aspect G1-4]
In the effect of selecting one mode of display from a plurality of modes of display including the first mode of display and the second mode of display, when the first mode of display is selected , the first production is performed,
In the effect of selecting one mode of display from a plurality of modes of display including the first mode of display and the second mode of display, when the second mode of display is selected , the second production is performed,
When the first effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the second effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-3, characterized by:
[Aspect G1-5]
The effect of selecting one mode of display from a plurality of modes of display including the display of the first mode and the display of the second mode is included in the ready-to-reach effect,
The first production is included in the super reach production,
The second production is included in the super reach production,
The gaming machine according to mode G1-4, characterized by:

The pending trigger effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. This pending trigger effect can be executed during the variation performance of the decorative symbols (during one variation performance), for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, during the ready-to-win performance (super ready-to-win performance), and the like.

[Hold trigger effect A]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the pending trigger effect A. FIG.
In the pending trigger effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a pending display effect is executed. In this suspension display effect, an ally character CRA and a suspension icon G2 are displayed. The pending icon G2 is displayed in the pending display area G21 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and is composed of a first pending icon G2B (maximum eight) representing pending and a second pending icon G2A representing the pending. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, only the first reserved icons (maximum four) corresponding to the reserved special figure 1 are shown in the drawing among the first reserved icons G2B. Therefore, the first pending icon G2B in the drawing corresponds to the pending image 9A. Hereinafter, the pending trigger effect will be shown in the same way. A form of the first pending icon G2B is shown in a circular shape.

It should be noted that the first pending icon G2B performs a pending shift effect of moving rightward (in the direction of the second pending icon G2A) when the change ends and the next change occurs. As shown in FIG. 67, the direction in which the first pending icon G2B shifts is also called the pending shift direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the suspension change effect is executed. In this pending change effect, the ally character CRA and the pending icon G2 are displayed, and a flash is emitted from the tip of the sword held by the ally character CRA, and the second pending icon G2A changes from a circle to a star shape. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), an information display effect is executed. In this information display effect, a teammate character CRA, a hold icon G2, and an information image G2C2 are displayed. The information image G2C2 is an image representing predetermined information, and is displayed in the information display area G2C1 based on the change in the mode of the second pending icon G2A. The information display area G2C1 is located in a direction different from the pending shift direction from the pending icon G2 (second pending icon G2A), and is provided at a position above and to the right of the pending display area G21. The information image G2C2 in FIG. 67(C) suggests development to a super ready-to-win effect A as advance notice information that can develop in the future.
After the information display effect, the super ready-to-win effect A is executed based on the information image G2C2.

[Hold trigger effect B]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the pending trigger effect B. FIG.
In the pending trigger effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a pending display effect is executed. In this suspension display effect, the ally character CRA, the suspension icon G2, and the information display area G2D1 are displayed. The pending icon G2 is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 67(A). The information display area G2D1 is located in a direction different from the pending shift direction from the pending icon G2 (second pending icon G2A), and is provided at a position above and to the right of the pending display area G21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the pending change effect is executed. In this pending change effect, the ally character CRA, the pending icon G2, and the information display area G2D1 are displayed, a flash is emitted from the tip of the sword held by the ally character CRA, and the shape of the second pending icon G2A changes from a circle to a star. A changing production is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), a medium movement effect is executed. In this medium movement effect, the teammate character CRA, the pending icon G2, the information display area G2D1, and the star-shaped medium image G2E are displayed, the second pending icon G2A ejects the star-shaped medium image G2E, and the star-shaped medium image G2E is displayed. An effect to reach the information display area G2D1 is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), an information display effect is executed. In this information display effect, the teammate character CRA, the hold icon G2, and the information image G2D2 are displayed. The information image G2D2 is an image representing predetermined information, and is displayed in the information display area G2C1 based on the fact that the state of the second pending icon G2A has changed and the star-shaped medium image G2E has reached the information display area G2D1. be. The information image G2D2 in FIG. 68(D) suggests development to a super ready-to-win effect A as advance notice information that can develop in the future.
After the information display effect, the super ready-to-win effect A is executed based on the information image G2D2.

[Hold trigger effect C]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the pending trigger effect C. FIG.
In the pending trigger effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 69(A), a pending display effect is executed. In this pending display effect, the ally character CRA, the pending icon G2, and the information display area G2F1 are displayed. The pending icon G2 is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 67(A). The information display area G2F1 is positioned in a direction different from the pending shift direction from the pending icon G2 (second pending icon G2A), and is provided at a position above and to the right of the pending display area G21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the suspension change effect is executed. In this pending change effect, the ally character CRA, the pending icon G2, and the information display area G2F1 are displayed, a flash is emitted from the tip of the sword held by the ally character CRA, and the shape of the second pending icon G2A changes from a circle to a star. A changing production is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), a medium transfer effect is executed. In this medium transfer effect, the friend character CRA, the pending icon G2, the information display area G2F1, and the mail medium image G2G are displayed, and the effect of passing the mail medium image G2G from the second pending icon G2A to the friendly character CRA is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a medium delivery effect is executed. In this medium delivery effect, the ally character CRA, the pending icon G2, the information display area G2F1, and the mail medium image G2G are displayed, and the ally character CRA delivers the mail medium image G2G received in the medium transfer effect to the information display area G2F1. A performance is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(E), an information display effect is executed. In this information display effect, a teammate character CRA, a hold icon G2, and an information image G2F2 are displayed. The information image G2F2 is an image representing predetermined information, the mode of the second pending icon G2A changes, the mail medium image G2G is transferred from the second pending icon G2A to the friend character CRA, and the mail medium image G2G is transferred to the friend character CRA. It is displayed in the information display area G2C1 based on the G2G being delivered to the information display area G2F1. The information image G2F2 in FIG. 69(D) suggests development to a super ready-to-win effect A as advance notice information that can develop in the future.
After the information display effect, the super ready-to-win effect A is executed based on the information image G2F2.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending trigger effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, in the hold trigger effects A to C, in the hold change effect, the state of the second hold icon G2A changes from a circle to a star. Information images G2C2, G2D2, and G2F2 are displayed in the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, and G2F1 based on the fact that the state of the second pending icon G2A has changed in the information display effect. According to this configuration, the information image is displayed with the change in the mode of the second pending icon G2A as a trigger, so that the value of the information shown in the information image can be increased, and the player can expect a big win. can do. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, in the pending trigger effect B, when the information image G2D2 is displayed in the information display area G2D1 in the information display effect, the star-shaped medium image G2E is displayed as the second image. A medium movement effect to reach the information display area G2D1 from the 2-hold icon G2A is executed. According to this configuration, the second pending icon G2A and the information display area G2D1 are associated with each other by the star-shaped medium image G2E, so the information shown in the information image displayed in the information display area G2D1 is executed in the variation. Things related to the performance can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can fully recognize the contents of the information shown in the information image. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the hold trigger effect C, a medium transfer effect is executed to pass the mail medium image G2G from the second hold icon G2A to the ally character CRA. In the delivery effect, the mail medium image G2G received by the ally character CRA in the medium transfer effect is delivered to the information display area G2F1, thereby moving the mail medium image G2G from the second holding icon G2A to the information display area G2F1. It is configured to reach According to this configuration, the second pending icon G2A and the information display area G2D1 are associated with the teammate character CRA and the mail medium image G2G, and the information shown in the information image displayed in the information display area G2D1 is Things related to the effect to be executed can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the player can fully recognize the content of the information shown in the information image, and the ally character CRA can receive the mail medium image G2G. The player can be entertained by the comical effect of propagating the As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, in the hold trigger effects A to C, in the information display effects, the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, and G2F1 display the hold icon G2 (the second hold icon G2A) is provided in a reserved display area G21 positioned in a direction different from the reserved shift direction. According to this configuration, by executing the pending shift effect and the information display effect on the display screen 7a, the effect can be made attractive by movements in various directions, so that the player can be entertained. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, G2F1 and the pending display area G21 are different areas that do not overlap each other in the pending trigger effects A to C. . According to this configuration, the display screen 7a has a different area in which the holding shift effect is executed and an area in which the information display effect is executed, so that the effect can be attractive in various places, so that the player can be entertained. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, information images G2C2, G2D2, and G2F2 are displayed in the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, and G2F1 in the information display effects in the pending trigger effects A to C. Thereafter, the super ready-to-win effect A is executed based on the information suggested by the information image (notice of development to the super ready-to-win effect A). According to this configuration, the player can be very interested in the information shown in the information images G2C2, G2D2, G2F2 displayed in the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, G2F1. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending trigger effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, in the hold trigger effects A to C, in the hold change effect, the state of the second hold icon G2A changes from a circle to a star. Information images G2C2, G2D2, and G2F2 are displayed in information display areas G2C1, G2D1, and G2F1 based on the fact that the state of the second pending icon G2A is changed in the information display effect. is not limited to For example, the information images G2C2, G2D2, and G2F2 may be displayed in the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, and G2F1 based on a change in the state of any one of the first pending icons G2B. In this case, the information displayed in the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, and G2F1 can be information corresponding to the changed pending icon (for example, information relating to variation effects of decorative symbols). For example, when the form of a certain reserved icon among the first reserved icons G2B changes, the decoration pattern corresponding to the certain reserved icon changes based on the change in the form of the certain reserved icon. An information image suggesting that the effect is an effect for informing a big win (“next notice: big win!!”, etc.) may be displayed in the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, G2F1.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, in the hold trigger effect B, an effect is executed in which the form of the second hold icon G2A changes from a circle to a star shape, and in the medium movement effect, the second hold icon G2A is executed. Although the star-shaped medium image G2E is used as the medium that moves from the icon G2A to the information display area G2D1, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the medium movement effect, the moving medium is a spherical medium image representing a spherical medium, a linear medium image representing a linear medium, an arrow-shaped medium image representing an arrow-shaped medium, and a speed linear medium. A speed linear media image or a balloon-like media image representing a balloon-like media may be used.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, G2F1 and the pending display area G21 are different areas that do not overlap each other in the pending trigger effects A to C. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, and G2F1 may be provided in the reserved display area G21, and the reserved display area G21 may be provided in the reserved display area G21. It may be set inside.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, in the hold trigger effects A to C, in the hold change effect, the state of the second hold icon G2A changes from a circle to a star. Information images G2C2, G2D2, and G2F2 are displayed in the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, and G2F1 based on the fact that the state of the second pending icon G2A is changed in the information display effect, but the present invention is not limited to For example, in the pending change effect, the effect of changing the form of the second pending icon G2A from a circle to a star is executed, and in the information display effect, based on the fact that the form of the second pending icon G2A has changed, the above-mentioned or A timer image and a button image to be described later may be configured to be displayed in the information display areas G2C1, G2D1, and G2F1.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, in the pending trigger effects A to C, the mode of the second pending icon G2A changes in the pending change effect. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the mode after the change. For example, in the pending change effect, when the mode of the second pending icon G2A changes to the first mode, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the mode of the second pending icon G2A changes to the second mode. You can set it higher.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, in the hold trigger effects A to C, when changing the state of the second hold icon G2A in the hold change effect, the shape is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when changing the mode of the second pending icon G2A, the color of the icon may be changed, or the pattern of the icon may be changed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect G2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
The pending icon includes an icon representing pending and an icon representing the pending,
It is configured to notify the number of pending by the number of display of the pending icon,
The pending icon is an icon that can be displayed in multiple modes,
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
The first effect is a effect that may change the mode of the pending icon from the first mode to the second mode,
The second effect is performed after the first effect, and based on the change of the pending icon from the first mode to the second mode, from the changed pending icon in the first direction It is an effect that predetermined information is displayed in the first area located,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G2-2]
In the second effect, when predetermined information is displayed in the first area located in the first direction from the changed pending icon, a predetermined medium is moved from the pending icon to the first area. A media display is performed that reaches the
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect G2-3]
In the second effect, the medium display is a display in which the predetermined medium is passed from the changed pending icon to a predetermined character, and the predetermined medium received by the predetermined character is displayed in the first area. realized by executing the display delivered to
The gaming machine according to mode G2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect G2-4]
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed,
The third effect is a effect of shifting the pending icon in a second direction to notify the pending number with the display number,
The first direction is a direction different from the second direction,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-1 to G2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect G2-5]
the pending icon is displayed in a second area;
The first area is an area different from the second area,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-1 to G2-4, characterized by:
[Aspect G2-6]
As one of the plurality of effects, a fourth effect may be performed,
The fourth effect is performed after the second effect, and a predetermined effect is executed based on the predetermined information displayed in the first area.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-1 to G2-5, characterized by:

The superimposition effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. FIG. This superimposed effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols (for example, during the reach effect (super reach effect)) or during the jackpot game. The superimposition effects include superimposition success effects A to C and superimposition failure effects. In the following, first, superimposition success effects A to C will be explained, and superimposition failure effects will be explained.

[Superimposition success effect A]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the superimposition success effect A. FIG.
In the superimposition success effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 70(A), an image appearance effect is executed. In this image appearance effect, a ring image G3A and a triangle image G3B are displayed. The ring image G3A and the triangle image G3B have different shapes. The ring image G3A is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the triangle image G3B is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. FIG. 70(A) shows the target position GC. This target position GC is an intermediate point between the ring image G3A and the triangle image G3B when they are displayed at the start of the image appearance effect. In the drawing, the target position GC is indicated by a "point", but it may not be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), an image movement effect is executed. In this image movement effect, the ring image G3A moves toward the target position GC, and the triangle image G3B moves toward the target position GC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), an image superimposition effect is executed. In this image superimposition effect, when the ring image G3A and the triangle image G3B reach the target position GC, they are superimposed to form one emblem image G3C (superimposed image). The emblem image G3C is composed of a ring portion corresponding to the ring image G3A and a triangle portion corresponding to the triangle image G3B, and is an image having relatively lower transparency than the ring image G3A and the triangle image G3B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up image G3D is displayed. The chance up image G3D is an image suggesting an up chance, and is displayed when the emblem image G3C (superimposed image) is formed by the successful superimposition. In the chance-up image G3D of FIG. 70(D), the characters "Extremely hot!!" suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high are displayed. The chance-up image G3D is represented as an utterance of the teammate character CRA.

[Superimposed success effect B]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining superimposition success effect B. FIG.
In the superimposition success effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), an image appearance effect is executed. In this image appearance effect, an emblem image G3E and a triangle image G3F are displayed. The emblem image G3E is composed of a ring portion and a triangle portion. The triangle image G3F has the same shape as a portion (triangle portion) of the emblem image G3E. The emblem image G3E is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the triangle image G3F is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. FIG. 71(A) shows the target position GC. This target position GC is an intermediate point between the emblem image G3E and the triangle image G3F when they are displayed at the start of the image appearance effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), an image movement effect is executed. In this image movement effect, the emblem image G3E moves toward the target position GC, and the triangle image G3F moves toward the target position GC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), an image superimposition effect is executed. In this image superimposition effect, when the emblem image G3E and the triangle image G3F reach the target position GC, they are superimposed to form one emblem image G3G (superimposed image). This emblem image G3G is an image with lower transparency than the emblem image G3E and the triangle image G3F. In this case, in the emblem image G3G, both the ring portion and the triangle portion may be images with lower transparency than the emblem image G3E and the triangle image G3F, or only the triangle portion may be more transparent than the emblem image G3E and the triangle image G3F. may be an image with low transparency, or only the ring portion may be an image with lower transparency than the emblem image G3E and the triangle image G3F. The emblem image G3G has the same shape as the emblem image G3E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a chance-up effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 70(D). In this chance-up effect, a chance-up image G3D is displayed. The chance up image G3D is an image suggesting a chance up, and is executed when the emblem image G3G (superimposed image) is formed by the successful superimposition.

[Superimposition success effect C]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the superimposition success effect C. FIG.
In the superimposition success effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), an image appearance effect is executed. In this image appearance effect, an emblem image G3H and an emblem image G3I are displayed. The emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I are each composed of a ring portion and a triangle portion and have the same shape. The emblem image G3H is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the emblem image G3I is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. FIG. 72(A) shows the target position GC. This target position GC is an intermediate point between the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I when the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I are displayed at the start of the image appearance effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), an image movement effect is executed. In this image movement effect, the emblem image G3H moves toward the target position GC, and the emblem image G3I moves toward the target position GC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), an image superimposition effect is executed. In this image superimposition effect, when the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I reach the target position GC, they are superimposed to form one emblem image G3J (superimposed image). This emblem image G3J is an image with relatively lower transparency than the emblem images G3H and G3I. The emblem image G3J, the emblem image G3H, and the emblem image G3I have the same shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a chance-up effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 70(D). In this chance-up effect, a chance-up image G3D is displayed. The chance up image G3D is an image suggesting a chance up, and is executed when the emblem image G3J (superimposed image) is formed by the successful superimposition.

[Superimposition failure effect]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the superimposition failure effect.
In the superimposition failure effect, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), an image appearance effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 72(A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), an image movement effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 72(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), an image through effect is executed. In this image-through effect, the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I are temporarily superimposed on the target position GC, but thereafter, the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I pass the target position GC, suggesting a failure of superimposition. be done. In other words, this image through effect is a effect in which the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I are separated from each other after the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I are temporarily superimposed on the target position GC, and no superimposed image is generated. .
When the image through effect is executed, that is, when the superimposition of the image fails, the chance-up effect is not executed, and the next predetermined effect is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the superimposed effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, two images with relatively high transparency appearing at different positions in the superimposition success effects A to C are directed toward the target position GC. By moving and reaching the target position GC with each other, one superimposed image with relatively low transparency is superimposed and a chance-up performance is executed based on the superimposed image being formed.
For example, in the superimposition success effect A, in the image appearance effect, a ring image G3A with relatively high transparency arranged in the upper left part of the display screen 7a and a relatively transparent ring image G3A arranged in the lower right part of the display screen 7a is displayed. In the image movement effect, the ring image G3A moves toward the target position GC, and the triangle image G3B moves toward the target position GC, and in the image superimposition effect, the ring image G3A and the triangle image G3B reach the target position GC. As a result, one emblem image G3C (superimposed image) having relatively low transparency is formed by superimposing. A chance-up effect is executed based on the formation of the emblem image G3C.
According to this configuration, two images with relatively high transparency are superimposed to form an image with relatively low transparency, so that the player can easily recognize the image and feel surprise. can. In addition, when the two images are superimposed successfully, the chance-up performance is executed, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the emergence of a suggestion with a high degree of expectation for a big win in the chance-up performance. . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, in the superimposition success effect B, an emblem image G3E and a triangle image G3F having the same shape as a part (triangle portion) of the emblem image G3E are superimposed, An emblem image G3G with relatively low transparency is formed. According to this configuration, two images having the same shape in part are superimposed to form an image with relatively low transparency, so that the player can pay attention to the movement of the part having the same shape in the two images. It is possible to sublimate the superimposed production into an interesting production. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, in the superimposition success effect C, the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I having the same shape are superimposed to form an emblem image G3J with relatively low transparency. be. According to this configuration, two images having the same shape are superimposed on each other to form an image with relatively low transparency. The performance can be sublimated into an interesting performance. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the emblem images G3E and G3H are superimposed on the triangle image G3F or the emblem image G3I in the superimposition success effects B and C, and the emblem image G3E is superimposed. , and G3H are formed. According to this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the movement of the emblem images G3E and G3H, and the superimposed effect can be sublimated into an interesting effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, in the superimposition success effects A to C, two images to be superimposed are displayed in the image appearance effect, and two images to be superimposed are displayed in the image movement effect. By moving the two images toward the target position GC located between the images, the two images are superimposed at the target position GC to form a superimposed image at the target position GC. According to this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the movement of the two images centering on the target position GC, and the superimposed effect can be sublimated into an interesting effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the chance-up effect is executed based on the successful superimposition of the two images in the superimposition success effects A to C. FIG. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the appearance of a suggestion that the degree of expectation for a big win is high in the chance-up effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, in the superimposition failure effect, in the image through effect, the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3I are once superimposed on the target position GC, and then the emblem image G3H and the emblem image G3H are overlapped. In this configuration, the emblem image G3I is separated, no superimposed image is generated, and the chance-up effect is not executed. According to this configuration, a player who has experienced that the chance-up performance is not executed due to the superimposition failure in the superimposition failure performance has a great expectation for the chance-up performance when the chance-up performance is executed in the superimposition success performance. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the superimposed effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, in the successful superimposition effect B, the triangle portion of the emblem image G3E and the triangle image G3F have relatively higher transparency than the emblem image G3G, which is the superimposed image. While the transparency is high, the ring portion of the emblem image G3E may have relatively low transparency, for example, the transparency of the ring portion of the emblem image G3G, which is a superimposed image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 73, in the superimposition success effects A to C and the superimposition failure effect, the target position GC is between two images that appeared at the start of the image appearance effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target position GC may be set at random, or a position relative to a predetermined position such as an ally character CRA may be set as the target position GC. good too.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, in the superimposition success effects A to C, in the image superimposition effect, two images are superimposed to form a superimposed image. Although the configuration is such that the chance-up effect is executed when the image is superimposed successfully, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of a chance-up effect, a point-giving effect in which predetermined points are awarded, a pseudo-continuous effect, a development-suggestion effect in which a ready-to-win effect is suggested, or a character appearance that suggests the appearance of a predetermined character. A suggestive effect or the like may be executed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 73, when two images are successfully superimposed in the superimposition success effects A to C, a chance-up effect is executed, and in the superimposition failure effect, two images are displayed. If the image superimposition fails, the chance-up effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in superimposition success effects A to C, when two images are successfully superimposed, a high-expectation chance-up effect is executed, and when two images are unsuccessfully superimposed, a low-expectation chance-up effect is executed. good too. The high-expectation chance-up production is a chance-up production with a high jackpot expectation compared to the low-expectation chance-up production.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a first image at a first position and displaying a second image at a second position different from the first position,
The second effect is performed after the first effect, and the first image and the second image are superimposed so that the first image and the second image are more transparent than the first image and the second image. is an effect in which a third image with a low intensity is generated,
The third effect is performed based on the generation of the third image in the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G3-2]
At least a part of the first image and the second image have the same shape,
The gaming machine according to mode G3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect G3-3]
The first image and the second image have the same shape,
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1 or aspect G3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect G3-4]
The first image and the third image have the same shape,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect G3-5]
In the second effect, by moving the first image and the second image to a third position between the first position and the second position, the third image is displayed. superimposing the first image and the second image at a position to produce the third image at the third position;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-4, characterized by:
[Aspect G3-6]
The third production includes a chance-up production, a point award production in which predetermined points are awarded, a pseudo-continuous production, a production that suggests the development destination of the ready-to-win production, or a production that suggests the appearance of a prescribed character. is one of
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-5, characterized by:
[Aspect G3-7]
As one of the plurality of effects, a fourth effect may be performed,
The fourth effect is performed after the first effect, and after the first image and the second image are superimposed, the first image and the second image are separated. , an effect in which the third image is not generated;
After the fourth production, the third production is not performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-6, characterized by:

74 to 77, the big win symbol display effects will be described below. This jackpot symbol display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, at the end of the reach effect (super reach effect)).

[Jackpot pattern display effect A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol display effect A. FIG.
In the jackpot symbol display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), the ready-to-win effect is executed. This ready-to-win performance is performed during the ready-to-win state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbols. The ready-to-win production includes a normal reach-to-win production with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big hit and a super ready-to-win production with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit. The super ready-to-win effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal ready-to-win effect. In addition, in this ready-to-win production, the "7" symbol is in the ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), a normal jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot normal notification effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed. This jackpot pattern array is displayed such that the pattern surface F1 of the pattern array is viewed from the front, in other words, the pattern surface F1 of the pattern array is displayed from the front. In FIG. 74(B), the jackpot pattern arrangement is a series of 7 patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), a right oblique view display effect is executed. In this right oblique view display effect, the big winning pattern arrangement is displayed in the right oblique view. In other words, this jackpot pattern array is displayed as if the pattern surface F1 of the pattern array is viewed obliquely from the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), a left oblique direction viewing effect is executed. In this left oblique view display effect, the jackpot pattern array is displayed in the left oblique view. That is, this big win pattern array is displayed as if the pattern surface F1 of the pattern array is viewed obliquely from the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), front view display effect is executed. In this front view display effect, the jackpot pattern array is displayed in front view. In other words, this jackpot pattern array is displayed as if the pattern surface F1 of the pattern array is viewed from the front.
After that, a jackpot game effect is executed.

[Jackpot pattern display effect B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol display effect B. FIG.
In the jackpot symbol display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), the ready-to-win effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), the jackpot normal notification effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), the right oblique view display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(C).
Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), the left oblique direction viewing effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(D).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), front view pattern enlargement display effect is executed. In this front view pattern enlargement display effect, the jackpot pattern array is displayed in front view, and the jackpot pattern array is displayed in an enlarged manner as compared with the jackpot pattern array shown in FIGS. 75(B) to 75(D). be. It should be noted that this is not limiting, and in the front view symbol enlargement display effect, the jackpot symbol array may be displayed in a larger size than any of the symbol arrays shown in FIGS. 75(B) to 75(D). .

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the front view display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(E).
After that, a jackpot game effect is executed.

[Jackpot pattern display effect C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol display effect C. FIG.
In the jackpot symbol display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the ready-to-win effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), the jackpot normal notification effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), the right oblique view display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(C).
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), the left oblique direction viewing effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(D).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), front view pattern reduction display effect is executed. In this front view pattern reduction display effect, the big win pattern array is displayed in front view, and the big win pattern array is displayed smaller than the big win pattern array shown in FIGS. 76(B) to 76(D). be. It should be noted that this is not the only option, and in the front-view symbol reduction display effect, the jackpot symbol array may be displayed in a smaller size than any of the symbol arrays shown in FIGS. 76(B) to 76(D). .

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), the front view display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(E).
After that, a jackpot game effect is executed.

[Jackpot pattern display effect D]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol display effect D. FIG.
In the jackpot symbol display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the ready-to-win effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the jackpot normal notification effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a right oblique view display effect is executed. In this right oblique view display effect, the jackpot pattern array is displayed in the right oblique direction (as if the pattern surface F1 of the pattern array is viewed from the right oblique direction), and the decorative patterns 8L and 8L forming the jackpot pattern array are displayed. 8C and 8R are adjacent to each other, and displayed as if the adjacent decorative patterns are overlapped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a left oblique direction viewing effect is executed. In this left oblique view display effect, the jackpot pattern array is displayed in the left oblique direction (as if the pattern surface F1 of the pattern array is viewed from the left oblique direction), and the decorative patterns 8L and 8L forming the jackpot pattern array are displayed. 8C and 8R are adjacent to each other, and displayed as if the adjacent decorative patterns are overlapped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(E), the front view display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 74(E).
After that, a jackpot game effect is executed.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the jackpot pattern display effect
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, in the jackpot symbol display effects A to D, after the jackpot normal notification effect, the right oblique view display effect is executed, and the left oblique view display effect is executed. is executed. According to this configuration, after the normal notification of the big win, the big win pattern arrangement (the pattern surface F1) is displayed in order as viewed from different directions, so that the big win is emphasized and the player is shown his or her congratulations. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, in the jackpot symbol display effects A to D, after the jackpot normal notification effect, the right oblique view display effect is executed, and the left oblique view display effect is executed. is executed, and the front view display effect is executed. According to this configuration, the big win pattern array (symbol surface F1) is displayed in order as viewed from three different directions, so that the big win can be emphasized and thereby the player can be congratulated. . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, in the jackpot symbol display effects A to D, after the jackpot normal notification effect, first, the right oblique direction display is performed. An effect is executed, then a left oblique view display effect is executed, and finally a front view display effect is executed. According to this configuration, by executing the oblique right direction view display effect and the oblique left direction view display effect, the big win pattern array (symbol face F1) is displayed in order as seen from two different directions, and the big win is achieved. is emphasized, and finally, the front view display effect is executed to further emphasize the big win, thereby showing congratulations to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, in the big win symbol display effect B, after the normal big win notification effect, the right oblique view display effect is executed, the left oblique view display effect is executed, and the front view display effect is executed. A view symbol enlargement display effect is executed. According to this configuration, the right oblique view display effect and the left oblique view display effect are executed, so that the big win pattern array (symbol surface F1) is displayed as seen from two different directions, and the big win is achieved. In addition to emphasizing, the front view pattern enlargement display effect is executed, and the big win can be further emphasized, thereby showing congratulations to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, in the jackpot symbol display effect B, after the jackpot normal notification effect, the right oblique direction display effect is first executed, and then the left oblique direction view display effect is executed. is executed, and then the front view pattern enlarged display effect is executed. According to this configuration, the right oblique view display effect and the left oblique view display effect are executed, so that the big win pattern array (symbol surface F1) is displayed in order as seen from two different directions, and the big win is achieved. can be emphasized, and after that, since the front view pattern enlargement display performance is executed instead of changing the direction view of the pattern surface F1 of the jackpot pattern arrangement, the jackpot can be emphasized more, thereby congratulating the player. can indicate the meaning of As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, in the big win symbol display effect C, after the normal big win notification effect, the right oblique view display effect is executed, the left oblique view display effect is executed, and the front view display effect is executed. A view symbol reduction display effect is executed. According to this configuration, the right oblique view display effect and the left oblique view display effect are executed, so that the big win pattern array (symbol surface F1) is displayed as seen from two different directions, and the big win is achieved. In addition to emphasizing, the front view pattern reduction display effect is executed, and the big win can be further emphasized, thereby showing congratulations to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, in the jackpot symbol display effect C, after the jackpot normal notification effect, the right oblique view display effect is first executed, and then the left oblique view display effect is executed. is executed, and then the front view pattern reduction display effect is executed. According to this configuration, the right oblique view display effect and the left oblique view display effect are executed, so that the big win pattern array (symbol surface F1) is displayed in order as seen from two different directions, and the big win is achieved. can be emphasized, and after that, since the front-view pattern reduction display performance is executed instead of changing the direction view of the pattern surface F1 of the jackpot pattern arrangement, the jackpot can be emphasized more, thereby congratulating the player. can indicate the meaning of As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, in the jackpot symbol display effect D, a right oblique view display effect or a left oblique view display effect is executed. In this right oblique view display effect, the jackpot pattern array is displayed in the right oblique direction (as if the pattern surface F1 of the pattern array is viewed from the right oblique direction), and the decorative patterns 8L and 8L forming the jackpot pattern array are displayed. 8C and 8R are adjacent to each other, and displayed as if the adjacent decorative patterns are overlapped. Alternatively, in the left oblique view display, the jackpot pattern array is displayed in the left oblique direction (as if the pattern surface F1 of the pattern array is viewed from the left oblique direction), and the decorative patterns 8L forming the jackpot pattern array are displayed. , 8C and 8R are adjacent to each other, and the adjacent decorative patterns are displayed so as to overlap each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the jackpot pattern arrangement look dignified, thereby showing congratulations to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the big hit symbol display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, in the jackpot symbol display effects A to D, right oblique direction display effect, left oblique direction display effect, front view enlarged symbol display effect, front A reduced view pattern display performance or a front view display performance is executed, but the notification order of these display performances is not limited to the display order of the jackpot symbol display performances A to D, and can be executed in various display orders. . For example, in the big win symbol display effect A, the front view display effect may be executed first, then the left oblique direction display effect may be executed, and then the right oblique direction view display effect may be executed. In addition, in the jackpot symbol display effect B, the front view symbol enlargement display effect is first executed, then the left oblique direction view display effect is executed, and then the right oblique direction view display effect is executed, followed by the front view display effect. A rendition may be performed. Further, in the jackpot symbol display effect C, the left diagonal direction view display effect is first executed, then the front view symbol reduction display effect is executed, then the right oblique direction view display effect is executed, and the front view display effect is executed. A rendition may be performed. Further, in the jackpot symbol display effect D, the left oblique direction display effect may be executed first, then the right oblique direction display effect may be executed, and then the front view display effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, in the jackpot symbol display effects A to D, right oblique direction display effect, left oblique direction display effect, front view enlarged symbol display effect, front A reduced view pattern display effect or a front view display effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the jackpot pattern display effect, an oblique upward direction view display effect may be executed in which the pattern face F1 of the jackpot pattern array is displayed as if viewed obliquely from above, or the pattern face F1 of the jackpot pattern array may be displayed downward. A downward oblique direction display effect may be executed in which the display is displayed as if viewed from an oblique direction. In addition, in the jackpot pattern display performance, a jackpot pattern turnover performance may be executed in which the pattern face F1 of the jackpot pattern array is turned over and the pattern face behind the pattern face F1 is displayed, or decorative patterns forming the jackpot pattern array may be executed. A symbol rotation display effect may be executed in which the symbol is rotated and displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, in the jackpot pattern display effects A to D, when the jackpot is announced using the jackpot pattern array, the right oblique direction display effect and the left oblique direction display effect are displayed. , enlarging design effect in front view, reducing display effect in front view, or display effect in front view is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, these effects may be applied to effects for temporarily stopping the decorative symbols, such as pseudo-continuous effects and ready-to-win effects. In this case, using the pattern arrangement when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the right oblique direction display effect, the left oblique direction display effect, the front view enlarged display effect, the front view reduced pattern display effect, or the front view A presentation may be performed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
The first production is a reach production,
The second effect is performed after the first effect, and is an effect of displaying a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot,
The second production may be produced in the first mode,
The second effect may be performed in a second mode,
The effect of the first mode is a effect of displaying the pattern surface of the jackpot pattern array as viewed from the first direction,
The effect of the second mode is a effect of displaying the pattern surface of the jackpot pattern array as if viewed from a second direction different from the first direction,
The second production is a production in which a production including the production of the first mode and the production of the second mode may be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-2]
The second effect may be performed in a third mode,
The effect of the third aspect is a effect of displaying the pattern surface of the jackpot pattern array as if viewed from the front,
The second production is a production in which a production including the production of the first mode, the production of the second mode, and the production of the third mode may be performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1, characterized by:
[Aspect F1-3]
In the second production, the production of the first mode is performed, then the production of the second mode is performed, and then the production of the third mode is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2, characterized by:
[Aspect F1-4]
The second effect may be performed in a fourth mode,
The production of the fourth mode is a production for performing a display to enlarge the jackpot pattern array,
The second production is a production in which a production including the production of the first mode, the production of the second mode, and the production of the fourth mode may be performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of modes F1-1 to F1-3, characterized by:
[Aspect F1-5]
In the second production, the production of the first mode is performed, then the production of the second mode is performed, and then the production of the fourth mode is performed.
The gaming machine according to mode F1-4, characterized by:
[Aspect F1-6]
The second effect may be performed in a fifth mode,
The production of the fifth mode is a production for performing a display to reduce the jackpot pattern array,
The second effect is an effect in which the first mode effect, the second mode effect, and the fifth mode effect are performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of modes F1-1 to F1-mode 5, characterized by:
[Aspect F1-7]
In the second production, the production of the first mode is performed, then the production of the second mode is performed, and then the production of the fifth mode is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-6, characterized by:
[Aspect F1-8]
The jackpot pattern array is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns,
The effect of the first mode is the effect of displaying the pattern surface of the jackpot pattern array as viewed from the first direction, and the decorative patterns constituting the jackpot pattern array are superimposed. Is displayed,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes F1-1 to F1-7, characterized by:

The resurrection effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. This character symbol display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, at the end of the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect)).

[Character design display effect A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the role product symbol display effect.
In the character symbol display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a ready-to-win effect is executed. This ready-to-win performance is performed during the ready-to-win state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbols. The ready-to-win production includes a normal reach-to-win production with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big hit and a super ready-to-win production with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit. The super ready-to-win effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal ready-to-win effect. In addition, in this ready-to-win production, the "7" symbol is in the ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a character movable effect is executed. This accessory movable effect is a determined effect, in which the board movable body 15 is movably controlled from the home position to the unfolded position, and arranged on the display screen 7a (a position that partially hides the display screen 7a). The display screen 7a is visible through the hole 15a of the movable board 15. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a jackpot symbol display effect A is executed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the jackpot pattern array using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the unfolded position. That is, the jackpot symbol display effect A is executed during the movable character effect. In FIG. 78(C), the jackpot pattern arrangement is a double pattern in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same pattern (7 patterns). In this case, on the display screen 7a, a part of the jackpot pattern array displayed in an area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 can be seen from the player's point of view. Specifically, from the hole 15a of the board movable body 15, a part of the jackpot pattern arrangement displayed on the display screen 7a (for example, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C) can be seen. Also, on the display screen 7a, a part of the jackpot pattern array displayed in the area corresponding to the outside of the board movable body 15 can be seen from the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot pattern array is formed with a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns. Specifically, when the jackpot pattern array is 3 patterns and 7 patterns, red decorative patterns are formed, and when the jackpot pattern array is 1 pattern and 5 patterns, green decorative patterns are formed. , When the jackpot pattern arrangement is an even number pattern (2, 4, 6, 8 patterns), it is formed with a blue decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a jackpot symbol display effect B is executed. In this jackpot pattern display performance B, the board movable body 15 is movably controlled from the development position to the home position, and the jackpot patterns using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where they disappear from the display screen 7a. Sequences are shown.

[Character design display effect B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the role product symbol display effect.
In the character symbol display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a ready-to-win effect similar to that in FIG. 78(A) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a character movable effect is executed. This accessory movable effect is a determined effect, in which the board movable body 15A is movably controlled from the home position to the unfolded position, and arranged on the display screen 7a (a position that partially hides the display screen 7a). The movable board body 15A has basically the same structure as the movable board body 15 shown in FIG. 78, but differs in that it has holes 15b and 15c instead of the holes 15a. The display screen 7a is visible through the holes 15b and 15c of the movable board 15. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), the jackpot symbol display effect A is executed. In this jackpot pattern display performance, the jackpot pattern array using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where the board movable body 15A is movably controlled to the unfolded position. That is, the jackpot symbol display effect A is executed during the movable character effect. In FIG. 79(C), the jackpot pattern arrangement is a double pattern in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same pattern (7 patterns). In this case, on the display screen 7a, a part of the jackpot pattern array displayed in an area that does not overlap the board movable body 15A can also be seen from the player's point of view. Specifically, from the hole 15b and the hole 15c of the board movable body 15A, a part of the jackpot pattern array displayed on the display screen 7a (for example, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C) can be seen. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a part of the jackpot pattern array displayed in the area corresponding to the outside of the board movable body 15A as seen from the player can also be seen.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot pattern array is formed with a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns. Specifically, when the jackpot pattern array is 3 patterns and 7 patterns, red decorative patterns are formed, and when the jackpot pattern array is 1 pattern and 5 patterns, green decorative patterns are formed. , When the jackpot pattern arrangement is an even number pattern (2, 4, 6, 8 patterns), it is formed with a blue decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a jackpot symbol display effect B is executed. In this jackpot pattern display performance B, the board movable body 15A is movably controlled from the development position to the home position, and in a state where it disappears from the display screen 7a, the jackpot patterns using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Sequences are shown.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the role product pattern display effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the ready-to-win effect is executed in the character symbol display effects A and B, and the board movable bodies 15 and 15A are controlled to move from the home position to the expanded position. and arranged on the display screen 7a (a position that partially hides the display screen 7a), and in this state, a jackpot pattern array using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case, on the display screen 7a, a part of the jackpot pattern array displayed in the area that does not overlap the board movable bodies 15 and 15A can also be seen from the player's point of view. Specifically, from the holes 15a, 15b, and 15c of the board movable body 15, a part of the jackpot pattern arrangement displayed on the display screen 7a (for example, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C) can be seen. Also, on the display screen 7a, a part of the jackpot pattern array displayed in the area corresponding to the outside of the board movable bodies 15 and 15A can be seen from the player's point of view. According to this configuration, the player can imagine the entire jackpot pattern array from a part of the jackpot pattern array even when the board movable body is positioned at the unfolded position, in other words, even during the performance of moving the character. You can feel the joy of quickly recognizing the jackpot. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the character symbol display effects A and B, the board movable bodies 15 and 15A are moved while the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is movably controlled from the deployment position to the home position. According to this configuration, the player can clearly recognize the jackpot pattern arrangement on the display screen 7a and be convinced of the jackpot. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the character symbol display effects A and B, when the board movable bodies 15 and 15A are at the home position, the display screen 7a is displayed. They are positioned so that they do not overlap. According to this configuration, when the board movable bodies 15 and 15A move to the unfolded position, the display on the display screen 7a can be suddenly hidden, so that the player can be given a sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, in the character symbol display effect B, the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the board movable body 15A having the holes 15b and 15c moves from the home position to the deployment position. , and placed on the display screen 7a (a position that partially hides the display screen 7a). In this state, a jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case, on the display screen 7a, a part of the jackpot pattern arrangement (for example, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C) displayed on the display screen 7a can be seen from the holes 15b and 15c of the movable board 15A. is. According to this configuration, even when the movable board body is positioned at the unfolded position, in other words, even during the performance of moving the character, the player can see the jackpot patterns from a part of the jackpot pattern array visible from two discontinuous areas. You can quickly imagine the entire array and feel the joy of recognizing the jackpot. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the character symbol display effects A and B, the jackpot symbol arrays are formed of a plurality of types of decorative symbols. Specifically, when the jackpot pattern array is 3 patterns and 7 patterns, red decorative patterns are formed, and when the jackpot pattern array is 1 pattern and 5 patterns, green decorative patterns are formed. , When the jackpot pattern arrangement is an even number pattern (2, 4, 6, 8 patterns), it is formed with a blue decorative pattern. According to this configuration, the board movable bodies 15 and 15A are movably controlled from the home position to the unfolded position and arranged on the display screen 7a (the position where a part of the display screen 7a is hidden). When the jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is shown in the figure, the type of the decorative pattern can be quickly recognized by the color seen from the holes of the board movable bodies 15, 15A, and the decorative pattern can be displayed. It is possible to associate the game state after the jackpot game from the type. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the role product pattern display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the character symbol display effects A and B, the jackpot symbol array has different colors depending on the symbols, so that a plurality of types of decorative symbols are formed. ing. Specifically, when the jackpot pattern array is 3 patterns and 7 patterns, red decorative patterns are formed, and when the jackpot pattern array is 1 pattern and 5 patterns, green decorative patterns are formed. , When the jackpot pattern arrangement is an even number pattern (2, 4, 6, 8 patterns), it is formed with a blue decorative pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the jackpot pattern array is 3 patterns and 7 patterns, it is formed with a red decorative pattern, and when the jackpot pattern array is 1 pattern and 5 patterns, It is formed with green decorative patterns, and when the jackpot pattern array has even-numbered patterns (2, 4, 6, 8 patterns), it is formed with blue decorative patterns. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the jackpot pattern array may be formed with a plurality of types of decorative patterns by having different "patterns" depending on the pattern. For example, when the jackpot pattern array is 3 patterns and 7 patterns, it is formed with tiger pattern decorative patterns, and when the jackpot pattern array is 1 pattern and 5 patterns, it is formed with leopard pattern decorative patterns, When the jackpot pattern arrangement is even-numbered patterns (2, 4, 6, 8 patterns), it is formed with decorative patterns of zebra patterns.
Also, the jackpot pattern array may be formed with a plurality of types of decorative patterns, which are the types of characters provided by the patterns. For example, when the jackpot pattern array is 3 patterns and 7 patterns, decorative patterns with a tiger character are provided, and when the jackpot pattern array is 1 pattern and 5 patterns, a leopard character is provided. When the jackpot pattern array is even-numbered patterns (2, 4, 6, 8 patterns), the decorative patterns are formed with no characters.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the character symbol display effects A and B, when the board movable bodies 15 and 15A are at the home position, the display screen 7a is displayed. Although they are positioned so as not to overlap, the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the character symbol display effects A and B, the board movable body 15 is displayed in the jackpot symbol display effect B in which the jackpot symbol array is displayed. , 15A from the deployed position to the home position, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control of returning the board movable bodies 15 and 15A from the developed position to the home position may be executed after the display of the big winning pattern array disappears.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, when the board movable bodies 15 and 15A are controlled to the unfolded positions in the character object symbol display effects A and B in the character object movement effect, In the display screen 7a, a part of the jackpot pattern array displayed in an area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 can be seen from the player's point of view, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the outer peripheries of the board movable bodies 15 and 15A may cover the outer perimeter of the display screen 7a so that the display screen 7a can be seen only through the holes 15a, 15b and 15c.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect F2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a movable accessory and display means,
The movable role product is capable of executing a plurality of role product effects,
A first role production may be performed as one of the plurality of role productions,
The first role production is a role production that changes the state of the movable role from the first state to the second state,
The first state is a state in which the movable accessory is at a first position,
The second state is a state in which the movable accessory is at a second position different from the first position and located in front of the display means, and is viewed from the player. and the movable accessory is in a position where it does not overlap the first area of the display means,
The display means is capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a reach effect,
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and is an effect of displaying a jackpot pattern array representing a big win in an area including the first area on the display means,
In some cases, a combination effect that combines the display effect and the character effect is performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the first character effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed when the first character effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F2-2]
A second role production may be performed as one of the plurality of role productions,
The second role production is performed after the first role production, and is a role production in which the state of the movable role is changed from the second state to the first state,
In the combination effect, the second character effect is performed during the second display effect,
The gaming machine according to aspect F2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect F2-3]
The first state includes a state in which the movable accessory does not overlap the display means as seen from the player.
The gaming machine according to aspect F2-1 or aspect F2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect F2-4]
The display means has a second area different from the first area and not continuous with the first area,
The second state is a state in which the movable accessory does not overlap the second region in addition to the first region of the display means as seen from the player,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot in an area including the first area and the second area on the display means.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F2-1 to F2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect F2-5]
The second display effect can display the jackpot pattern array in a plurality of modes when the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the display means,
One aspect of the jackpot pattern array of the plurality of aspects is the jackpot pattern array of the first aspect,
One aspect of the jackpot pattern arrangement of the plurality of aspects is a jackpot pattern arrangement of a second aspect different from the first aspect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F2-1 to F2-4, characterized by:
[Aspect F2-6]
The jackpot pattern array of the first aspect and the jackpot pattern array of the second aspect are different in color,
The gaming machine according to aspect F2-5, characterized by:

The button image meter effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This meter effect in the button image is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern (during one variable effect) (for example, when the decorative pattern starts to change, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. can be

[Meter effect in button image A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the intra-button-image meter effect A. FIG.
In the button image meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, a button image E1A and a meter image E1B are displayed. The button image E1A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The meter image E1B is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure), and the movement of the meter area represents the meter value. Further, the meter image E1B is horizontally arranged within the button image E1A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a point giving effect is executed. In this point giving effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B and a point acquisition image E1C are displayed. This point giving effect can be executed multiple times. The point acquisition image E1C is an image suggesting that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, the player has acquired predetermined points. The point acquisition image E1C in FIG. 80(B) shows that 3 points (3P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 3 points). Further, in the meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A, it is shown that the meter area has been enlarged by the points and the meter value has increased due to the points being given. The meter value of the meter image E1B increases each time the point giving effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E1B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This point-giving production is a reach production, a super reach production, a chance-up production (jackpot expectation level suggestion production), a jackpot announcement production, a reach development destination announcement production, a pending change announcement, a look-ahead production, a pending expectation level suggestion production, or pseudo It can be started according to execution of various effects such as continuous effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a chance-up image E1D are displayed. The meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A shows that the meter area is enlarged and the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). The chance-up image E1D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX).The chance-up image E1D in FIG. !” and the characters “Expectation 50%,” which suggests that the expected degree of jackpot is about 50%. displayed next to each other.

[Meter effect B in the button image]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the intra-button-image meter effect B. FIG.
In the in-button-image meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), similarly to FIG. 80(A), a button meter display effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the point giving effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 80(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B and a timer image E1E are displayed. The meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A shows that the meter area has been enlarged and the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). The timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the timer image E1E, the timer value is displayed in a countdown method, and 50 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E1F and a timer image E1E are displayed. The button image E1F is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image E1F is displayed in the same size as the button image E1A at the position where the button image E1A was, and "PUSH" is displayed in the image, the button image E1A is darkened, and/or This image represents a state as if the button image E1A is lit. Adjacent to the button image E1F, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The timer image E1E shows that the timer value has become "0 seconds". The button image E1F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E1F disappears after the valid operation period has passed. Note that the meter image E1B may be displayed within the button image E1F. In this case, the meter value of the meter image E1B may show the maximum (MAX), or may return to the initial value (no meter area).

After the button pressing effect, when the player presses the effect button 63 within the effective operation period due to the button pressing effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As the predetermined production, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or look-ahead start announcement are executed. obtain.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the meter effect in the button image is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, in the button image meter effects A and B, when the button image E1A is displayed, the meter image E1B is displayed. This meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A. Then, after the meter image E1B is displayed, when the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum (MAX), a predetermined effect (chance-up effect, etc.) is executed. According to this configuration, since the meter image E1B is arranged within the button image E1A, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation for the button effect, and other effects than the button effect are performed in relation to the meter display. When done, the player can be given a sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, in the button image meter effects A and B, the point giving effect is executed when the meter image E1B is arranged within the button image E1A. In the point giving effect, when the point acquisition image E1C is displayed and the predetermined points are given, the meter area is enlarged by the points given in the meter image E1B, and the display with the increased meter value is executed. be. According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image increases by giving the points, it is possible to emphasize the increase in the meter value due to the acquisition of the points. Further, when the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image increases due to the point award and reaches a predetermined value (maximum value), and the button effect using the effect button 63 develops, the player wins big. can give great hope to As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, in the button image meter effects A and B, the chance up image E1D or the timer image E1E is replaced with the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. displayed next to each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the development of the button performance using the performance button 63, and further, a sense of expectation for a big win when the button performance develops. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, in the button image meter effect B, the timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX) in the timer display effect. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer image E1E reaches the predetermined value, the player has a sense of anticipation for the development of the button performance using the performance button 63, and furthermore, a big win when the button performance develops. It can give you a sense of expectation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, in the button image meter effect B, when the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes "0 seconds" in the button press effect, the player is given an effect. A button image E1F prompting the user to press the button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation for the development of the button performance using the performance button 63, and a stronger sense of expectation for a big win when the button performance develops. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are displayed when the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum (MAX). sometimes executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed when the meter value of the meter image E1B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are performed. It is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot when it develops into. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the meter effect in the button image is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, in the button image meter effects A and B, the chance up image E1D or the timer image E1E is replaced with the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Although displayed adjacently, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance up image E1D or the timer image E1E may be placed within the button image E1A or a predetermined distance from the meter image E1B. It may be displayed in a remote position.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, in the meter effects A and B within the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E1B is at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area may be reduced and the meter value may drop due to the award of points in the point award effect. good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 80(C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 81(C) may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, in the meter effects A and B within the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area is expanded and the meter value is increased by executing a predetermined action. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 80(C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 81(C) are executed. It should be noted that "execution of a predetermined action" means, for example, execution of a pseudo-coup, change of a hold icon (display of a hold change), and execution of a predetermined chance-up effect. and successful completion of a given challenge (game).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, in the button image meter effects A and B, the chance up effect and the timer display effect are such that the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum value (MAX). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be configured to be executed not when the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum value (MAX) but when it becomes a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, after the chance up image E1D is displayed in the chance up effect in the button image meter effect A, the meter value of the button image E1A is set to the initial value (0). may be set back to . After that, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, in the meter effect B within the button image, the meter image E1B is not displayed in the button pressing effect. It is not limited, and the meter image E1B may be displayed. In this case, the meter image E1B may be arranged within the button image E1F. After that, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the in-button-image meter effects A and B are executed during one variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effects A and B may be executed over a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, in the button image meter effect B, the timer image E1E is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the timer image E1E may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the above-described button-pressing effect can be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, one timer image is displayed in the button image meter effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be displayed at the same time.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes;
the third display effect is a effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed, and in the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed. , the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the meter is displayed in the first operation portion image of the first display effect, and after the second display effect, the A third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E1-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect in which predetermined points are awarded,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed, and when the predetermined points are awarded in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. In the display effect of 2, a display is performed in which the meter is set to a second mode to a third mode different from the first mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display that may be performed adjacent to the first operation unit image,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-4]
the predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a timer display;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-5]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect,
The fifth display effect is a second operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value. is displayed,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-4, characterized by:
[Aspect E1-6]
In the third display effect, when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes is when the value of the meter reaches the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5, characterized by:

82 and 83, the button image display effects will be described below. This display effect in the button image is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during one variation effect) (for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. can be

[Inside button image display effect A]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the intra-button-image display effect A. FIG.
In the button image meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, a button image E2A and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The meter image E2B is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the drawing), and the movement of the meter area represents the meter value. Further, the meter image E2B is arranged horizontally below and adjacent to the button image E2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a point giving effect is executed. In this point giving effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a point acquisition image E2C are displayed. This point giving effect can be executed multiple times. The point acquisition image E2C is an image suggesting that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired predetermined points. The point acquisition image E2C in FIG. 82(B) shows that 4 points (4P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 4 points). In addition, the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A shows that the meter area has been enlarged by the points and the meter value has increased due to the points given. The meter value of the meter image E2B increases each time the point giving effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E2B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This point-giving production is a reach production, a super reach production, a chance-up production (jackpot expectation level suggestion production), a jackpot announcement production, a reach development destination announcement production, a pending change announcement, a look-ahead production, a pending expectation level suggestion production, or pseudo It can be started according to execution of various effects such as continuous effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a chance-up image E2D are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, the meter area is enlarged, indicating that the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). The chance-up image E2D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX).The chance-up image E2D in FIG. !" is displayed. The chance up image E2D is displayed in the button image E2A.

[Inside button image display effect B]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the intra-button-image display effect B. FIG.
In the in-button-image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), similarly to FIG. 82(A), the button meter display effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the point giving effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 82(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), the meter MAX notification effect is executed. In this meter MAX notification effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, the meter area is enlarged to show that the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). The meter value suggesting image E2E is an image that is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX) and suggests that the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). Also, the meter value suggesting image E2E is displayed within the button image E2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E2F, a meter value suggestion image E2E, and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2F is displayed in the same size as the button image E2A, and is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. It is an image showing that. Specifically, the button image E2F is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image E2A is darkened and/or a state in which the button image E2A is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image E2F, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E2F disappears after the effective operation period has passed. The meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed within the button image E2F. Note that the meter value suggesting image E2E may be displayed adjacent to the button image E2F instead of within the button image E2F, or may be displayed within the meter image E2B. Also, the meter value of the meter image E2B in FIG. 83(D) represents the maximum (MAX). In addition, not only this but the meter value of the meter image E2B may return to the initial value (there is no meter area|region).

After the button pressing effect, when the player presses the effect button 63 by the button pressing effect, a predetermined effect is executed. Predetermined productions include reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (jackpot expectation level suggestion production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, timer display production, or pre-reading start announcement, etc. A rendition can be performed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the display effect in the button image is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the in-button-image display effects A and B, when the button image E2A is displayed, the meter image E2B is displayed and the meter image E2B is displayed. , the chance up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX). According to this configuration, the player who sees the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can associate execution of the button effect using the effect button 63 . Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed, it is possible to give the player a great expectation for the big win with respect to the button effect. Further, since the predetermined effect is executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed, it is possible to create a sense of surprise in the predetermined effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the button image display effects A and B, the point giving effect is executed while the meter image E1B is being displayed. , the point acquisition image E2C is displayed, and when predetermined points are given, the meter area is enlarged by the points given in the meter image E2B, and the display with the increased meter value is executed. According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image increases as points are awarded, the player can recognize the increase in the meter value due to the acquisition of points. Therefore, the chance up image E2D or the meter value suggestive image E2E can be displayed according to the change in the meter value, so that the player can be given a sense of excitement and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, in the button image display effect B, the meter value indication indicating that the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum (MAX) is displayed in the meter MAX notification effect. The image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A was displayed. According to this configuration, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the player is reminded that the button performance using the performance button 63 will be executed before the button pressing performance. can be done. Therefore, when the button effect (including the button pressing effect) is actually executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big win with respect to the button effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, in the button image display effect B, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the player is asked to press the effect button 63. A button image E2F prompting is displayed, and a meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed. According to this configuration, display of the meter value suggesting image E2E in the area where the button image E2F is displayed can give the player a feeling of expectation for a big win in a predetermined effect developed by pressing the effect button 63. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the button image display effects A and B, the chance up image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed when the meter value of the meter image E2B is Executed at maximum (MAX). According to this configuration, the display of the chance-up image E2D and the meter value suggesting image E2E is performed when the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), compared to the case where the chance-up image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed. It is possible to increase expectations for a big win when the image E2D and the meter value suggestive image E2E are displayed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the in-button-image display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the intra-button-image display effects A and B, the meter image E2B is arranged below and adjacent to the button image E2A. is not limited to this. For example, the meter image E2B may be displayed within the button image E2A. With this configuration, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation for the button effect, and other effects than the button effect are performed in relation to the meter display. When done, the player can be given a sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, the meter image E2B may be arranged in a predetermined direction with a predetermined distance from the button image E2A.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the button image display effects A and B, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the button image E2A is displayed. The chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggesting image E2E is displayed in the area (within the button image E2A), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), an image suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect, an image suggesting a ready-to-win notice, and a jackpot expectation are displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (within the button image E2A). Various images, such as an image suggesting that the good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, in the button image display effect B, in the button pressing effect, the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed (within the button image E2F). Although shown, the invention is not so limited. In the button pressing effect, for example, in the area where the button image E2F is displayed (inside the button image E2F), a chance-up image E2D, an image suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect, an image suggesting a ready-to-win notice, and the degree of expectation for a big win are displayed. Various images such as suggestive images may be displayed, and various effects such as a predetermined character moving effect may be executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (within the button image E2A).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the meter value of the meter image E2B increases as points are awarded in the in-button-image display effects A and B. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E2B is at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area may be reduced and the meter value may drop due to the award of points in the point award effect. good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 82(C) or the meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 83(C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the meter value of the meter image E2B increases as points are awarded in the in-button-image display effects A and B. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area is expanded and the meter value is increased by executing a predetermined action. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 82(C) and the meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 83(C) are executed. It should be noted that "execution of a predetermined action" means, for example, execution of a pseudo-coup, change of a hold icon (display of a hold change), and execution of a predetermined chance-up effect. and successful completion of a given challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the in-button-image display effects A and B, the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect are such that the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX ), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect may be executed not when the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX), but when it becomes a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E2B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, after the chance-up image E2D is displayed in the in-button-image display effect A, the meter value of the meter image E2B is set to the initial value (0). may be set back to . After that, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, after the meter image E2B is displayed in the button-pressing effect in the in-button-image display effect B, the meter value of the button image E2A is set to the initial value (0 ). After that, a point giving effect may be executed, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the in-button-image display effects A and B are executed during one variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effects A and B may be executed over a plurality of variable effects.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes;
the third display effect is a effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed, and the first display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed. and in the third display effect, when the meter is in the first mode, the predetermined display is performed in an area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E2-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect in which predetermined points are awarded,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed, and when the predetermined points are awarded in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. A display is performed in which the meter of the display effect of 2 is set to a second mode to a third mode different from the first mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E2-3]
the predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display suggesting that the meter has changed to the first mode;
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E2-4]
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed, and the meter of the second display effect is the first display effect of the first display effect. displayed in the operation unit image of 1,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E2-5]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes in the third display effect, and then the second operation section is performed. the predetermined display is performed in the area where the image is displayed;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4, characterized by:
[Aspect E2-6]
In the third display effect, when the meter is in the first mode among the plurality of modes is when the value of the meter reaches the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5, characterized by:

The multiple variation effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. This multiple variation effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols over multiple variations (including reach effect (super reach effect)).

[Multiple variation production A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect A. FIG.
In the multiple variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the variation meter display effect is executed. In this variable meter display effect, a pending icon E3 and a meter image E3C are displayed. The pending icons E3 are composed of a first pending icon E3B (maximum eight) representing pending and a second pending icon E3A representing the pending. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, only the first reserved icons (maximum four) corresponding to the reserved special figure 1 are shown in the figure among the first reserved icons E3B. That is, in the drawing, the first pending icon E3B corresponds to the pending image 9A. Hereafter, in the multiple variation production, it will be shown in the same way.

The meter image E3C is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure), and the movement of the meter area represents the meter value. Moreover, the meter image E3C is vertically arranged on the right end of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the variable point giving effect is executed. This variable point giving effect is an effect executed during the same variable effect as the variable meter display effect described above, and a pending icon E3, a meter image E3C, and a point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The variable point giving effect can be executed multiple times during the same variable effect. The point acquisition image E3D is an image suggesting that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has obtained predetermined points. The point acquisition image E3D in FIG. 84(B) shows that 2 points (2P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 2 points). Further, in the meter image E3C, since the points have been given, the meter area corresponding to the points has been expanded compared to when the variable meter display effect was performed, and the meter value has increased. The meter value of the meter image E3C increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3C represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This variable point granting production is a reach production, a super reach production, a chance up production (a production that suggests the expectation of a big hit), a big hit announcement production, a notice of the development of reach, a notice of pending change, a look-ahead production, a production that suggests the expectation of a hold, or , a pseudo-continuous effect, etc. can be started in response to execution of various effects. Similarly, the next variation point giving effect, which will be described later, can also be executed in response to the execution of these various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), the next variation point giving effect is executed. This next variable point imparting effect is an effect that is executed during the next variable effect after the above-described variation meter display effect and the variable point imparting effect (the variation). An image E3C and a point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The next variation point giving performance can be executed multiple times during the same variation performance. The point acquisition image E3D shown in FIG. 84(C) indicates that 5 points (5P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). Further, in the meter image E3C, since the points have been awarded, the meter area corresponding to the points has been expanded compared to when the variation point is awarded, and the meter value has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a button pressing effect is executed. This button pressing effect is an effect executed during the same variable effect as the next variable point giving effect described above, and the button image E3E, the hold icon E3 and the meter image E3C are displayed. The button image E3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image E3E is an image that is represented as "PUSH" in the image and represents a state as if it were lit. Adjacent to the button image E3E, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the effective operation period has passed. Also, the meter value of the meter image E3C in FIG. 84(D) represents the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a pending icon E3 and a chance-up image E3F are displayed. The chance up image E3F is an image suggesting an up chance, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E3F of FIG. 84(E), the character "It's hot!!" is displayed, which suggests that the expectation of a big win is high. The chance-up image E3F is represented as an utterance of the teammate character CRA.

[Multiple variation production B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect B. FIG.
In the multiple variation effect B, as shown in FIGS. 85(A) to 85(E), the variation meter display effect, the variable point giving effect, the next variable point giving effect, the button pressing effect, and the chance up effect are performed. executed. These effects are basically the variable meter display effect shown in FIGS. 84(A) to 84(E), the variable point giving effect, the next variable point giving effect, the button pressing effect, and the chance up effect. are basically the same, but in the multiple variation effect B, the button image E3G is displayed in the variation meter display effect, the variable point giving effect, and the next variable point giving effect. This button image E3G is arranged substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and has a premonition that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on.

[Multiple variation production C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect C. FIG.
In the multiple variation effect C, as shown in FIG. 86(A), the variation meter display effect is executed. In this variable meter display effect, a hold icon E3 similar to that in FIG. 84(A), a button image E3G similar to that in FIG. 85(A), and a meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is a meter whose meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter area moves to represent the meter value, and the area where the button image E3G is displayed (within the button image E3G). placed in

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the variable point giving effect is executed. This variable point giving effect is an effect that is executed during the same variable effect as the variable meter display effect described above, and the same pending icon E3 as in FIG. 84B and the same point as in FIG. An acquired image E3D, a button image E3G similar to that in FIG. 85(B), and a meter image E3H are displayed. This variable point imparting effect can be executed multiple times during the same variable effect. The meter image E3H shows that the meter area for the points is enlarged as compared with the time when the variable meter display effect is performed, and the meter value is increased by giving the points. The meter value of the meter image E3H increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3H represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the next variation point giving effect is executed. This next variable point imparting effect is an effect executed during the next variable effect after the variation (pertinent variation) in which the above-mentioned variable meter display effect and the relevant variable point imparting effect are executed. A similar pending icon E3, a point acquisition image E3D similar to that of FIG. 84(C), a button image E3G similar to that of FIG. 85(C), and a meter image E3H are displayed. This next variation point giving effect can be executed multiple times during the same variation effect. The meter image E3H shows that the meter area for the points is expanded as compared with the time when the variable point is given, and the meter value is increased due to the points being given.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), a button pressing effect is executed. This button pressing effect is an effect that is executed during the same variable effect as the next variable point giving effect described above. , and a meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is displayed in the area where the button image E3E is displayed (within the button image E3E). The meter value of the meter image E3H in FIG. 86(D) represents the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a pending icon E3, a button image E3G, a meter image E3H, and a timer image E3I are displayed. The timer image E3I is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image E3I shown in FIG. 86(E) shows "100 seconds" as the timer initial value. This timer image E3I is displayed adjacent to the button image E3G. Incidentally, when the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes "0 seconds", a predetermined effect, for example, a chance-up effect as shown in FIG. 85(E) may be executed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the multiple variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, in the multiple variable performances A to C, the point award performance is executed across a plurality of continuous variable performances. The meter images E3C and E3H representing the cumulative value of the acquired points (cumulative points) are displayed. When the meter value (accumulated points) of the meter image reaches the maximum (MAX), a button depression effect is executed in which a button image E3E is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63. FIG. A chance-up effect, a timer display effect, etc. are executed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. According to this configuration, even if the accumulated points do not reach the maximum (MAX) in one variable performance, the points are taken over to the next variable performance, so that the player can, over a plurality of variable performances, You can enjoy the production that earns points. In addition, when the accumulated points acquired over a plurality of variable performances reach the maximum (MAX), the button pressing performance is executed, so that the button pressing performance can be emphasized. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, in the multiple variable performances B and C, the point giving performance is executed across a plurality of continuous variable performances. The meter images E3C and E3H representing the cumulative value of the acquired points (cumulative points) are displayed. The button image E3G is displayed while the meter images E3C and E3H are being displayed. According to this configuration, the execution of the button performance using the performance button 63 can be anticipated by accumulating the points, so that the player can be given a sense of excitement and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the meter image E3H representing the cumulative value of acquired points (cumulative points) is displayed in the area where the button image E3G is displayed (button image E3G). According to this configuration, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation for the button effect, and other effects than the button effect are performed in relation to the meter display. When done, the player can be given a sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the multiple variation effects A and B, after the button pressing effect, the chance-up effect, which is the effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, is executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is executed based on the points accumulated across a plurality of variable performances, so that the chance-up performance suggests a high degree of expectation for a big win. can raise the expectations of As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, in the multiple variation effect C, the timer display effect is executed after the button pressing effect. According to this configuration, the timer display effect is executed based on the points accumulated over a plurality of variable effects, so that the effect that the expectation of the big win is high when the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes 0 seconds. It is possible to raise expectations for the execution of As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the chance up effect or the timer display effect is the maximum (MAX) meter value of the meter images E3C and E3H. sometimes executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are at a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are performed. It is possible to increase expectations for a big win when the game develops into a timer display effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the multiple variation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, in the multiple variation performances A to C, as part of the look-ahead performance (continuous performance spanning multiple variations), the point grant performance or the next variation point grant A configuration in which points are given in the effect (a configuration in which points are obtained over a plurality of variable effects as part of the look-ahead effect) may be employed. According to this configuration, every time a point is obtained, the expectation for the big win can be increased, and as a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the cumulative points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H in the multiple variation effects A to C, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the accumulated points may be expressed numerically instead of by meter values. Also, the accumulated points may be indicated by numerically expressing the remaining points until the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the button image is displayed when the chance up effect or timer display effect is performed, and the chance up effect or timer display effect is performed. A display effect may be performed within the button image. Also, the point acquisition image E3D may be displayed within the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H in the multiple-variation effects A to C are increased by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the variable meter display effect, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value drops as points are given by the point giving effect. may be configured. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 84(C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86(C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H in the multiple-variation productions A to C are increased by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area is expanded and the meter value is increased by executing a predetermined action. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 84(C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86(C) are executed. It should be noted that "execution of a predetermined action" means, for example, execution of a pseudo-coup, change of a hold icon (display of a hold change), and execution of a predetermined chance-up effect. and successful completion of a given challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, in the multiple variable effects A to C, the chance up effect and the timer display effect have the maximum value (MAX) of the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are the maximum value (MAX), but when they reach a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the timer image E3I is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value is counted down in the multiple variation effect C, but the present invention is limited to this. isn't it. For example, the timer image E3I may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the above-described button pressing effect can be executed. Also, a plurality of timer images E3I may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the multiple variation effects A to C are executed during a plurality of continuous variation effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. C may be performed for one variation effect.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed after the button-pressing effect in the multiple-variation effects A to C, but the present invention is not limited to this. Other effects may be executed after the effect. Other productions include pseudo-continuous production, reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (suggestion of jackpot expectation level production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or pre-reading start announcement. It may be a configuration in which production can be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E3-1]
a symbol display means capable of performing symbol variation display to stop after starting the variation display of symbols;
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
an operation unit operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect in which predetermined points are acquired over a plurality of consecutive symbol fluctuation displays, and a point suggestion display is performed to suggest the accumulated points acquired,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the accumulated points in the first display effect reach a predetermined value, the second display effect is performed, and the player operates the operation unit. Depending on, a predetermined production will be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E3-2]
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination effect is a effect that may include a third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed while the first display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the first display effect may be performed in an area where the second operation unit image is displayed in the third display effect.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-4]
The predetermined production is a production including a display that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-5]
The predetermined effect is a effect including a timer display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-4, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-6]
Equipped with a look-ahead effect execution means capable of executing a look-ahead effect,
In the first display effect, a predetermined point is obtained over a plurality of consecutive symbol fluctuation displays as the look-ahead effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-5, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-7]
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, it is when the accumulated points reach the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-6, characterized by:

The operation charge presentation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. This operation charge effect is performed in parallel with the variation effect of the decorative pattern. Of course, this includes the execution of a reach effect (super reach effect).

[Operation charge effect A (success)]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect A (success).
First, in the operation charge effect A (success), as shown in FIG. 87(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. Further, pending images 9A and 9B and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears on the right side of the screen from above and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect stops.

The sword image KG has its hilt portion divided into a plurality of areas. Specifically, it is divided into six adjacent regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing color of these regions R1 to R6 is initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the drawing color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Then, the drawing color is changed from blue to red in a predetermined order such as regions R2->R3->R4->R5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(E), a charge effect (final stage) is executed. In the charging effect (final stage), the rendering color of the region R6 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the above-described change in the drawing color of the region R5.
Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction rendering, an image is displayed to instruct pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 . Specifically, a text image TG saying "Press!" is displayed together with an arrow image YG for instructing the pressing of the button image BG.

[Operation charge effect A (failure)]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect A (failure).
First, in the operation charge effect A (failure), as shown in FIG. 88(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. Further, pending images 9A and 9B and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG moving downward in the sword movement effect stops.

The sword image KG has its hilt sectioned into a plurality of areas. Specifically, it is divided into six adjacent regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing color of these regions R1 to R6 is initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the rendering color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Next, the drawing color of the region R2 is changed from blue to red.
Note that the variable start effect, sword movement effect, sword stop effect, and charge effect (initial) shown in FIGS. 88A to 88D are similar to the operation charge effect (success) shown in FIG. It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), the charge effect (mid-term) is executed. In the charge effect (mid-term), the rendering color of the region R3 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This change follows the change in the drawing color of the region R2 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), a variable continuation effect is executed. In the variable continuation effect, the sword image KG is not displayed, and the effect is the same as the variable start effect shown in FIG. 88(A). In other words, when the region R3 changes from blue to red, the charge effect is interrupted and the same effect as the variable start effect is performed.

[Operation charge effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect B. FIG.
First, in the operation charge effect B, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. Further, pending images 9A and 9B and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a charge notice effect is executed. In the charge notice effect, the charge notice image is displayed while the button image BB1 indicating the effect button 63 is displayed. Here, an elliptical charge notice image JG1 marked with "C" is shown. The button image BB1 has five areas S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a charging effect is executed. In the charge effect, the drawing color of the area of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red, triggered by the appearance of the charge notice image in the charge notice effect described above. Here, the state in which the region S1 has changed from blue to red is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a charge notice effect is executed. The charge advance notice effect is the effect described in FIG. 89B, and here, an elliptical charge advance notice image JG2 marked with "C×4" is shown. As the charge notice image, "C×2", "C×3", "C×4", and "C×5" are prepared separately from the charge image "C". The number of regions to be changed from blue to red is determined by the numerical value written behind the "x".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a charging effect is executed. The charge effect is the effect described with reference to FIG. 89(C), and the drawing color of the area of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red when the charge notice image appears. Here, four areas S2 to S5 are changed from blue to red to correspond to the charge notice image JG2 of "C×4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button pressing instruction effect, an image for instructing pressing of the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG reading "Push!" is displayed.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas as shown in FIGS. When the drawing color of all areas is changed to red, the button press instruction effect is executed. According to this configuration, the change in the drawing color leads to the expectations of the player, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89B and 89D, a charge notice image is displayed as a charge notice effect. Triggered by the display of this charge notice image, a charge effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 89(C) and 89(E). That is, the plurality of regions S1 to S5 are changed from blue to red in a predetermined order. According to this configuration, the display of the charge notice image can give the player a sense of anticipation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the charging notice image JG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 89(B), one area S1 is drawn in the charging effect as shown in FIG. The color is changed from blue to red. On the other hand, when the charge notice image JG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 89(D), the drawing color of the two or more regions S2 to S5 is changed from blue to red as shown in FIG. 89(E). be done. According to this configuration, the degree of expectation of the player can be varied depending on the type of charge notice image, and interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of adjacent regions R1 to R6. According to this configuration, the charge effect becomes easy to understand, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when all the drawing colors of the regions R1 to R6 become red as shown in FIG. be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88(E), even if the drawing color of the regions R1 to R3 is red, if the regions R4 to R6 are blue, the button pressing instruction effect is not executed. According to this configuration, expectations are raised as to whether the charging effect will be successful, and interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the present embodiment are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the rendering color of all the regions R1 to R6 of the sword image KG becomes red, the button press instruction effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 89, when the drawing color of all the areas B1 to B5 of the button image BB1 becomes red, the button depression instruction effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button pressing instruction effect may be executed when the drawing color of a part of the area turns red.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the handle portion of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas S1 to S6 as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the entire sword image KG may be divided into a plurality of areas.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the drawing color of the area is changed from blue to red, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a wireframe display is performed in which the color of the area is the same color as the background color, and the drawing color of the area of the wireframe image is changed (painted) good.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E4-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying an image of the operation means,
The image of the operation means has a plurality of areas,
By changing the drawing color of the plurality of areas from the first drawing color to the second drawing color in a predetermined order, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the operable state of the operation means. Amusement machine.
[Aspect E4-2]
A specific image can be displayed at a predetermined timing during fluctuation,
Triggered by the display of the specific image, the gaming machine changes the drawing color of the plurality of areas from a first drawing color to a second drawing color in a predetermined order.
[Aspect E4-3]
When the first specific image among the specific images is displayed, the drawing color of one of the plurality of regions is changed, and when the second specific image among the specific images is displayed, the plurality of A gaming machine characterized by changing the drawing color of two or more areas out of the areas.
[Aspect E4-4]
A gaming machine, wherein the image of the operation means is divided into a plurality of adjacent areas.
[Aspect E4-5]
When the drawing colors of the plurality of areas all become the second drawing color, the operation means becomes operable, and when the drawing colors of the plurality of areas include areas other than the second drawing color, the operation means A gaming machine characterized in that it does not enter an operable state.

The pseudo consecutive point rendering will be described below with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. FIG. This pseudo consecutive point effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (during one variation effect) (for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols or during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect)).

[Pseudo consecutive point effect A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo consecutive point effect A. FIG.
In the pseudo consecutive point effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 90(A), the pseudo consecutive effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuation effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image E5A and a meter image E5B are displayed. The pseudo-continuous suggestive image E5A is an image reminiscent of the pseudo-continuous effect, and more specifically, "pseudo × 2" is shown to suggest that the pseudo-continuous effect is the second time. Further, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern suggesting the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the manner of "7, logo symbol, 7". The meter image E5B is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross hatching in the drawing), and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E5B is vertically arranged at the right end of the display screen 7a. The pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again after the point giving effect.

The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a point giving effect is executed. This point giving effect is executed in response to the execution of the above-described pseudo-continuous effect, and a meter image E5B and a point acquisition image E5C are displayed. This point-giving effect can be executed when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed again during the same variable effect, or according to another effect. That is, the point giving effect can be executed multiple times during the same variable effect. The point acquisition image E5C is an image suggesting that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has obtained predetermined points. The point acquisition image E5C in FIG. 90(B) indicates that 5 points (5P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). Further, in the meter image E5B, since the points are given, the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged compared to when the variable meter is displayed, and the meter value is increased. The meter value of the meter image E5B increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5B represents the cumulative value of acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E5D and a meter image E5B are displayed. The button image E5D is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image E5D is an image that is represented as "PUSH" in the image and represents a state as if it were lit. Adjacent to the button image E5D, the characters "PUSH!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the effective operation period has passed. A meter image E5B in FIG. 90(C) indicates that the meter value is maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a chance-up effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the valid operation period. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up image E5E is displayed. The chance up image E5E is an image suggesting an up chance, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E5E of FIG. 90(D), the characters "It's super hot!!" suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high. The chance-up image E5E is represented as an utterance of the teammate character CRA.

[Pseudo consecutive point effect B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining pseudo consecutive point effect B. FIG.
As for the pseudo consecutive point effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect is executed as shown in FIG. 91(A). In this pseudo-continuation effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image E5A, a button image E5G, and a meter image E5F similar to those in FIG. 90(A) are displayed. The button image E5G is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The meter image E5F is a meter with a moving meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the drawing), and the movement of the meter area represents the meter value. Further, the meter image E5F is arranged horizontally in the area (within the button image E5G) where the button image E5G is displayed. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns as in FIG. 90(A), and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo design suggesting the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the manner of "7, logo symbol, 7". The pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again after the point giving effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a point giving effect is executed. This point giving effect is executed in response to the execution of the above-described pseudo-continuous effect, and a button image E5G, a meter image E5F, and a point acquisition image E5C similar to FIG. 90(B) are displayed. This point-giving effect can be executed again when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed again during the same variable effect, or according to another effect. That is, the point award effect can be executed multiple times. Further, in the meter image E5F arranged in the button image E5G, since the points are given, the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged compared to when the variable meter is displayed, and the meter value is increased. ing. The meter value of the meter image E5F increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5F represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, a button image E5D similar to that in FIG. 90(C) and a meter image E5F are displayed. The meter image E5F is arranged in the area where the button image E5D is displayed, that is, within the button image E5D. A meter image E5F in FIG. 91(C) indicates that the meter value is maximum (MAX). The button image E5D has the same shape as the button image E5G.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), the timer display effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the valid operation period. In this timer display effect, a button image E3G, a meter image E5F, and a timer image E5H similar to those in FIG. 91(A) are displayed. The timer image E5H is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. The timer image E5H shown in FIG. 91(D) shows "100 seconds" as the timer initial value. This timer image E5H is displayed adjacent to the button image E5G. When the timer value of the timer image E5H becomes "0 seconds", a predetermined effect, for example, a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 90(D) or a pseudo continuous effect can be executed again.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pseudo consecutive point effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, the pseudo consecutive effects are executed, and the cumulative value of the points given in the point giving effects (cumulative points) is displayed using the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F, and the button image E5D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX), and when the player presses the production button 63, the chance increases. Effects and timer display effects are executed. According to this configuration, points are accumulated according to the realization of the pseudo-continuous effect, and when the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX), an effect such as a chance-up effect or a timer display effect can be executed. You can make it more interesting. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, in the pseudo consecutive point effect B, the meter image E5F is displayed during the pseudo consecutive effect or during the point giving effect. According to this configuration, the execution of the button performance using the performance button 63 can be anticipated during the pseudo-continuous performance or during the point giving performance, so that the player can be given a feeling of excitement and enjoyment of the game is improved. can be made

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, the meter image E5F suggesting accumulated points is arranged in the area where the button image E5G is displayed (within the button image E5G) in the pseudo consecutive point effect AB. be. According to this configuration, the player can associate the button effect using the effect button 63 with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation for the button effect, and other effects than the button effect are performed in relation to the meter display. When done, the player can be given a sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, in the pseudo consecutive point effect A, after the button pressing effect, a chance-up effect, which is a effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, is executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is executed based on the points given by the pseudo-continuous performance, so there is a sense of expectation that the chance-up performance suggests a high degree of expectation for a big win. can increase As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, in the simulated consecutive point effect B, the timer display effect is executed after the button pressing effect. According to this configuration, the timer display effect is executed based on the points given by the pseudo-continuous effect, so when the timer value of the timer image E5H becomes 0 seconds, the effect with a high expectation for a big win is executed. You can raise your expectations. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, the chance up effect or the timer display effect has the maximum (MAX) meter value of the meter images E5B and E5G. is executed when According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5G are at a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are performed. It is possible to increase expectations for a big win when the game develops into a timer display effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pseudo consecutive point effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the pseudo-continuous effects A and B, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), the button pressing effect is performed. In response to the player's depression of the effect button 63, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), even if the player does not press the effect button 63, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect may be executed. Further, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), the button pressing effect is not executed (the button image E5D is not displayed), and the chance up effect and timer display effect are executed. good too.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the accumulated points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B. It is not limited. For example, the accumulated points may be expressed numerically instead of by meter values. Also, the accumulated points may be indicated by numerically representing the remaining points until the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, the button image is displayed when the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed. A timer display effect may be executed within the button image. Also, the point acquisition image E5C may be displayed within the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B increase as points are awarded. , the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, during the pseudo continuous effect, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value drops due to the awarding of points in the point awarding effect. good too. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 90(C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 91(C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B increase as points are awarded. , the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area is expanded and the meter value is increased by executing a predetermined action. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 90(C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 91(C) are executed. It should be noted that "execution of a predetermined action" means, for example, execution of a pseudo-coup, change of a hold icon (display of a hold change), and execution of a predetermined chance-up effect. and successful completion of a given challenge (game).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect have the maximum value (MAX) of the meter images E5B and E5F. ), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are the maximum value (MAX) but when they reach a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, the timer image E5H is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down in the pseudo consecutive point effect B, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing For example, the timer image E5H may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the above-described button-pressing effect can be executed. Also, a plurality of timer images E5H may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , B may be executed during a plurality of successive variable presentations.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed after the button pressing effect in the pseudo consecutive point effects A and B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the button pressing effect, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed again. Further, after the button pressing effect, after the button pressing effect, another effect may be executed. As other productions, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or look-ahead start announcement are executed. Any configuration may be used.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E5-1]
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
an operation unit operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a pseudo continuous effect,
The second display effect is a effect in which a certain point is given and a point suggestive display is given to suggest the accumulated points of the given points,
the third display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the certain point is given in response to the performance of the first display effect, and the point suggestion display is performed. After that, the third display effect is performed in response to the accumulated points reaching a predetermined value, and a predetermined effect is performed when the player operates the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E5-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed when the first display effect is being performed, or when the second display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E5-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the second display effect may be performed in an area where the second operation unit image is displayed in the fourth display effect.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E5-4]
The predetermined production is a production including a display that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E5-5]
The predetermined effect is a effect including a timer display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-4, characterized by:
[Aspect E5-6]
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, it is when the accumulated points reach the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-5, characterized by:

The winning ball number display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 92 . This number-of-acquired-balls display effect can be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, it can be displayed as one of the round game effects executed by the image control microcomputer 101 upon receiving a round designation command from the sub-control board 90 .

[Acquisition ball number display effect]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball number display effect. In the winning ball number display effect, first, the winning image display of FIG. 92(A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that won the first big prize opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 in which the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) is "long open". It is executed when at least a portion of subsequent game balls pass through the V area 39 . Here, a V winning image WP indicating that the game ball has passed through the V area 39 is displayed. Since the V winning image WP is an image suggesting that a high-probability time-saving state will occur later, it can be said that the image suggests that a game state that is advantageous to the player will occur later. In FIG. 92A, the character image CRA1 is displayed while the V prize image WP is being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the display CGN of the number of pitches that can be obtained this time is displayed. The number of balls that can be acquired this time is a measure of the number of balls that can be acquired in one round game. Here, at the start of the round next to the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71, the number of obtainable balls display CGN this time is displayed as a measure of the number of obtainable balls in the round game. In FIG. 92(B), a plurality of right-handed shot images RD1 and RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed in a state in which the number of balls that can be acquired this time display CGN is displayed. The right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are images suggesting that the game ball is shot to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the currently acquired ball number display AAN is displayed. The number of currently obtained balls is the number of balls already obtained in the winning game. Here, at the start of the round, the number of balls acquired from the first round of the jackpot game to before the start of the round game is displayed as the number of currently acquired balls display AAN. Note that in FIG. 92(C), a plurality of right-handed shot images RD1 and RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed in a state in which the currently acquired ball number display AAN is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), the currently acquired ball number display AAN and the planned cumulative acquired ball number display TPN are displayed. The planned cumulative acquired number of balls is the number of balls scheduled to be acquired at the end of this round. Here, during the round game from the start of the round, the planned accumulated acquired ball number display TPN is displayed adjacent to the currently acquired ball number display AAN. In FIG. 92(D), the planned cumulative number of acquired balls display TPN and the currently acquired number of balls display AAN are displayed vertically adjacent to each other, and a plurality of character images CRA1 and CRA2 are also displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the acquired ball number display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the number of currently obtained balls AAN is displayed while a plurality of right-handed hitting images RD1 and RD2 are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of exhilaration by knowing the number of balls already obtained in the jackpot game and a sense of anticipation for further acquisition by the right-handed display, thereby improving interest. can be planned.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92(D), during the round game, the expected cumulative acquired ball number display TPN is displayed adjacent to the current acquired ball number AAN. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an exhilarating feeling that the number of currently acquired balls approaches the planned cumulative number of acquired balls, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the number of balls display CGN that can be obtained this time is displayed at the start of the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration by knowing the number of balls that can be obtained in the current round, and improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the V winning image WP shown in FIG. 92(A) is displayed before the currently obtainable pitch number display CGN shown in FIG. 92(B) is displayed. According to this configuration, by suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous state, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a plurality of right-handed hitting images RD1 and RD2 are displayed together with the display CGN of the number of balls that can be obtained this time. According to this configuration, it is possible to give both a feeling of exhilaration by knowing the number of balls that can be obtained in this round and a feeling of anticipation that it will be realized by right-handed hitting by the right-handed display, thereby improving interest. be able to.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the winning ball number display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92(A), an effect is shown in which the V winning image is illustrated as an image suggesting that the game state will be advantageous to the player later. However, instead of the V winning image, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image other than the V winning image that suggests that the game state will be advantageous to the player later. The image other than the V winning image that suggests that the game state will be advantageous to the player later is, for example, an image that suggests the start of a big win game, an image that suggests the start of a small win game, or the like. is.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92B and 92C, two right shot images are displayed. However, the gaming machine 1 may display three or more right-handed images. Also, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed images having different sizes. In addition, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right hitting images RD1 and RD2 in FIG. 92(D).

[Modification 3]
The acquired ball number display effect may be executed in a special game other than the jackpot game. For example, it may be executed during a small winning game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image suggesting that a game ball is shot in a predetermined direction;
In a state in which a plurality of the first images are displayed during a winning game, a first effect can be executed in which the number of balls currently acquired representing the number of balls already acquired in the winning game is displayed. Amusement machine.
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
During the round game, it is possible to execute a second effect of displaying, adjacent to the display of the currently obtained number of balls, a planned accumulated number of obtained balls representing the number of balls to be obtained at the end of the current round. game machine.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
A gaming machine capable of executing a third performance of displaying the number of balls obtainable this time representing the number of balls obtainable in the current round at the start of a round game.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state later;
The game machine is capable of executing a fourth effect in which the second image is displayed on the display means before the third effect is executed.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the third effect, the first image is displayed together with the display of the number of balls obtainable this time.

The payout display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. FIG. This payout display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols in the variable probability state or the time saving state (for example, the final stage of the ready-to-win effect (before the start of the jackpot game)), or during the jackpot game.

[Payment display effect A]
93 is a diagram for explaining the payout display effect A. FIG.
In the payout display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a payout schedule display effect is executed. This payout schedule display effect is executed after the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot) is announced, before the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot game), or during the jackpot game, and the payout is performed. A projected ball number suggesting image D2A is displayed. The scheduled payout number of balls indication image D2A is an image suggesting the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the scheduled payout number of balls). The scheduled payout number suggestion image D2A in FIG. 93(A) indicates that 800 balls are scheduled to be paid out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is displayed. The image D2B indicating the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is a jackpot that was won prior to the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a past jackpot during consecutive wins) among consecutive jackpots during the time saving state (hereinafter also referred to as consecutive jackpots). is an image suggesting the number of balls (hereinafter also referred to as the cumulative scheduled payout number of balls) obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game. In other words, the cumulative payout ball number suggesting image D2B suggests the number of balls to be paid out in a jackpot game based on a jackpot during consecutive games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. In this cumulative payout additional display effect, a cumulative payout ball number suggesting image D2B and a cumulative payout ball number suggesting image D2C are displayed. The cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C is the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the past jackpots during the consecutive wins plus the number of balls paid out, which is the number of balls already paid out during the jackpot game. It is an image suggesting the number (hereinafter also referred to as the cumulative number of paid-out balls). In other words, the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C suggests the number of balls that have already been paid out in the jackpot game based on the jackpot during consecutive wins. In FIG. 93(C), the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is arranged below the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C, and between the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C. is indicated by a slash (line). That is, the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is placed at the denominator position, and the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2C is placed at the numerator position, and is expressed in the form of "accumulated payout ball number/accumulated payout ball number". .

This payout display effect A is executed in the case of a big win that shifts to the variable probability state with time reduction, and is not executed in the case of a big win that shifts to the non-variable probability state with time reduction. In addition, not limited to this, the payout display effect A may be executed even at the time of the big win, which does not shift to the non-probability variable state with time reduction.

[Payment display effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining a payout display effect B. FIG.
In the payout display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), the payout schedule display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and includes the cumulative payout ball number suggesting image D2B, the jackpot payout ball number related image D2E, and the number of consecutive wins suggested. Image D2D is displayed. The payout ball number related image D2E indicates the number of balls already paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the payout ball number) and the scheduled payout ball number. In FIG. 94(B), the display of the number of balls to be paid out is arranged to the right of the display of the number of balls to be paid out, and a slash ( line) are shown. That is, the display of the number of balls to be paid out is placed in the denominator position, and the display of the number of balls to be paid out is placed in the position of the denominator. The image D2D indicating the number of times of consecutive games is an image indicating the number of times of winning consecutive games, that is, the number of times of winning consecutive games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. This cumulative payout additional display effect is executed during the jackpot game, and a payout ball number related image D2E, a consecutive winning number suggestion image D2D, and a cumulative payout ball number related image D2F are displayed. The cumulative payout ball number related image D2F suggests the cumulative payout ball number and the cumulative payout ball number. In FIG. 94(C), the display of the cumulative payout ball number is arranged on the right side of the display of the cumulative payout ball number, and a slash ( line) are shown. That is, the display of the cumulative number of payout balls is placed in the denominator position, and the display of the cumulative number of payout balls is placed in the denominator position.

In the payout display effects A and B, as described above, the payout schedule display effect is executed at the end of the variable effect (reach effect) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. is executed at the end of the variable performance (reach performance) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout additional display performance can be executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, for example, in the payout display effects A and B, the payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect and the cumulative payout additional display effect are executed during the jackpot game.

This payout display effect B is executed in the case of a big win that shifts to the variable probability state with time reduction, and is not executed in the case of a big win that shifts to the non-variable probability state with time reduction. In addition, not limited to this, the payout display effect B may be executed even at the time of the big win without shifting to the non-probability variable state with time reduction.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the payout display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the payout display effects A and B, an image D2A indicating the number of balls to be paid out is displayed in the scheduled payout display effect, and the cumulative payout display effect is displayed. , the cumulative payout ball number suggestion image D2B is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can grasp the cumulative number of balls to be paid out during the consecutive wins in addition to the number of balls to be paid out in the jackpot game, so that the player's willingness to play can be improved. . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the payout display effects A and B, when the cumulative payout ball number is displayed in the cumulative payout additional display effect, the cumulative payout ball number is displayed. The number of payout balls is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play until the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is reached. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, when the cumulative payout number of balls is displayed in the payout display effect B in the cumulative payout display effect or the cumulative payout additional display effect, The number of payout balls is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the number of balls to be paid out, and can increase the player's desire to play until the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is reached. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, in the payout display effect C, when the cumulative number of expected payout balls is displayed, the number of consecutive wins is suggested. According to this configuration, the average number of balls to be paid out (average number of balls to be paid out) in one jackpot game can be associated from the relationship between the cumulative number of balls to be paid out and the number of consecutive wins. , the player can feel a sense of happiness, and when the average number of payout balls is small, the player's willingness to play can be improved in order to extend the consecutive chances. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the payout display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative payout additional display effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. There may be a case where the cumulative payout additional display effect is not executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the payout display performances A and B, the display indicating the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. isn't it. For example, when the gaming state after the big win is not the variable probability gaming state, the display showing the cumulative number of balls to be paid out may not be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the payout display effects A and B are executed in the order of the payout schedule display effect, the cumulative payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout additional display effect. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the order of these may be changed. For example, the order of the payout schedule display effect, the cumulative payout additional display effect, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect may be used, or the order of the cumulative payout schedule display effect, the payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout additional display effect may be used.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the payout display performances A and B, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is determined based on the jackpot during the consecutive games. is not limited to this. For example, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpots won prior to the jackpot (cumulative number of balls paid out on the day) among the consecutive jackpots from the morning of the day. The number of balls (accumulated number of balls scheduled to be paid out on the day) may be added to the number of balls scheduled to be paid out. In this case, the cumulative number of balls paid out on the day may also be displayed.
In addition, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpots that were won before the jackpot (cumulative number of balls to be paid out at a predetermined timing) among the jackpots that were consecutive from a certain timing. The number of balls to be paid out may be added (accumulated number of balls to be paid out at a predetermined timing). In this case, the cumulative payout ball number at a predetermined timing may also be displayed. The gaming machine 1 may have a function that allows the player to determine "certain timing". This allows the player to arbitrarily set "certain timing".

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
Determination means for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery;
a jackpot game executing means capable of executing a jackpot game for paying out game media to a player in the case of a jackpot;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect for performing a scheduled payout display representing a scheduled payout number, which is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out in the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot,
The first jackpot is a jackpot in a second game state that is more advantageous for the player than in the first game state,
The second display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot is equal to the number of game media in the first jackpot game. It is an effect that displays the cumulative payout schedule showing the cumulative payout quantity added with the payout plan quantity,
The second jackpot is a jackpot that is won before the first jackpot among consecutive jackpots including the first jackpot during the second gaming state,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D2-2]
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and the game already paid out during the first jackpot game is equal to the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game. It is an effect that displays the cumulative payout number that shows the cumulative payout number including the number of media,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed while the second display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect D2-3]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and is a jackpot payout display representing the number of game media already paid out during the first jackpot game,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed while the second display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect D2-4]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is performed during the first big win game, and is a performance of displaying the number of continuous big wins representing the number of times of the continuous big wins,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect D2-5]
When the first jackpot is a jackpot in which the game state after the first jackpot game is a third game state more disadvantageous than the second game state, the combination effect is not executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4, characterized by:

The winning image/character image superimposition effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This winning image/character image superimposition effect can be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, it can be displayed as one of the round game effects executed by the image control microcomputer 101 upon receiving a round designation command from the sub-control board 90 .

[Prize-winning image/character image superimposed effect A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the winning image/character image superimposition effect A. FIG. In the winning image/character image superimposition effect A, first, the winning image display of FIG. 95(A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that won the first big prize opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 in which the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) is "long open". It is executed when at least a portion of subsequent game balls pass through the V area 39 . Here, a V winning image WP indicating that the game ball has passed through the V area 39 is displayed. Since the V winning image WP is an image suggesting that a high-probability time-saving state will occur later, it can be said that the image suggests that a game state that is advantageous to the player will occur later. In FIG. 95(A), a character image AN1 and a right-handed shot image RD1 are displayed while the V winning image WP is being displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves leftward. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to partially overlap the V winning image WP.

The first character image AN1 moves to the position of the V winning image WP, and the winning image/character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 95(B) is executed. Specifically, an image in which the first character image AN1 is superimposed on a portion of the V winning image WP is displayed. In other words, an image showing a state in which the first character image AN1 is positioned in front of part of the V winning image WP is displayed. Even when the first character image AN1 is superimposed, part of the V winning image WP is displayed without being hidden. In FIG. 95(B), a second character image AN2 and a right shot image RD1 are also displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves leftward following the first character image AN1.

By moving both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 to the left, the winning image/character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 95(C) is executed. Specifically, an image in which both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 are superimposed on a portion of the V winning image WP is displayed. In FIG. 95(C), a right hitting image RD1 is further displayed.

By further moving the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 to the left, the winning image/character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 95(D) is executed. Specifically, an image in which only the second character image AN2 is superimposed on a portion of the V winning image WP is displayed. In other words, the V winning image WP is displayed without overlapping the first character image AN1. The first character image AN1 is framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a.

After that, the second character image AN2 moves further to the left, so that the winning image and the character image are not superimposed as shown in FIG. 95(E). Specifically, the V winning image WP in which the character images (the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2) are not overlapped is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 95(F), the second character image AN2 is framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a.

[Prize-winning image/character image superimposed effect B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the winning image/character image superimposition effect B. FIG.
The winning image/character image superimposed effect B differs from the superimposed effect A of FIG. 95 in that the shape of the V winning image WP changes. The shape of the V winning image WP of the superimposed effect B changes so as to represent a state in which the figure representing the three-dimensional shape of the Roman letter "V" is horizontally rotated. First, in FIG. 96A, a character image AN1 and a right-handed shot image RD1 are displayed while the V prize image WP is being displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves leftward. The right shot image RD1 is displayed so as to partially overlap the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), the shape of the V winning image WP changes compared to that shown in FIG. 96(A), and the first character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP. image is displayed. The V winning image WP has a shape showing a state in which the figure representing the three-dimensional shape is oriented more laterally than in FIG. 96(A). Even when the first character image AN1 is superimposed, a part of the V prize image WP is displayed. In FIG. 96(B), a second character image AN2 and a right shot image RD1 are also displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves leftward following the first character image AN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), while the shape of the V prize image WP changes as compared to FIG. An image in which both of the images AN2 are superimposed is displayed. In FIG. 96(C), a right hitting image RD1 is further displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), while the shape of the V winning image WP changes compared to FIG. 96(C), only the second character image AN2 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP. A status image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), the V winning image WP is displayed in a state where the character image is not superimposed while the shape of the V winning image WP changes as compared with that in FIG. 96(D). After that, in FIG. 96(F), the V winning image WP is displayed in a state where the character image is not superimposed while the shape of the V winning image WP changes compared to that in FIG. 96(E).

[Prize-winning image/character image superimposed effect C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the winning image/character image superimposition effect C. As shown in FIG.
The winning image/character image superimposed effect C differs from the superimposed effect B in FIG. 96 in the display method of the character image AN1. The character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C does not move left and right on the display screen 7a to intersect with the V winning image WP, but changes in shape according to the change in shape of the V winning image WP. Specifically, the character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C is arranged on one side of the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP, and rotates horizontally when the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP rotates horizontally. The shape changes to represent such a state. First, as shown in FIG. 97A, an image in which the character image AN1 is superimposed on the V winning image WP is displayed. Specifically, an image showing a state in which the character image AN1 is positioned in part of the front of the V prize image WP is displayed. Even when the first character image AN1 is superimposed, a part of the V prize image WP is displayed. The right shot image RD1 is displayed so as to partially overlap the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the shapes of the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 change from those in FIG. 97(A). Specifically, an image is displayed showing a state in which the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented more laterally than in FIG. 97(A). Even in this state, the image is such that the character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), an image is displayed showing a state in which the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V prize image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented more laterally than in FIG. 97(B). Here, the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented horizontally, and the V winning image WP is displayed without overlapping the character image AN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 rotates more laterally than in FIG. 97(C). An image is displayed in which the other side on which the character image AN1 is not arranged can be seen. The character image AN1 is hidden by the V winning image WP, and the V winning image WP is displayed without overlapping the character image AN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 rotates more horizontally than in FIG. 97(D). An image is displayed in which the other side on which the character image AN1 is not arranged is the front side. The character image AN1 is partially visible between the V prize images WP, but the V prize image WP is displayed without overlapping the character image AN1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97F, the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 rotates more horizontally than in FIG. The V winning image WP is displayed in a state where it cannot be seen and the character image AN1 is not superimposed thereon.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning image/character image superimposed effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95(B) to (D), FIGS. 96(B) to (D), and FIGS. An image with the character image superimposed on is displayed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 95(A), (E), (F), FIGS. 96(A), (E), (F), and FIGS. 97(C) to (F), V prizes in which the character images are not overlapped An image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the display of the V winning image WP, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95(B) to (D), FIGS. 96(B) to (D), and FIGS. 97(A) and (B), Even when the image with the character image superimposed thereon is displayed, another part of the V prize image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, even if the character image overlaps a part of the V winning image WP, the player can see a part of the V winning image WP, so that the player can be notified that the V winning image has been won. It can be convinced, and the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95, 96 (A) (B) (D) to (F) and FIGS. An image in which the right-hand shot image is superimposed on a part of the image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, the V winning image WP appears to be positioned behind the right-handed image, so that the display can have a sense of depth, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the V winning image WP changes its shape so as to represent a state in which a three-dimensional figure of Roman letter "V" is rotated. According to this configuration, the V winning image WP appears to be positioned behind the right-handed image, so that the display can have a sense of depth, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, an effect is executed in which the character image is superimposed on the V prize image WP, and in which the character image is not superimposed. According to this configuration, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the display of the V winning image WP, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Modification]
A modification of the winning image/character image superimposition effect will be described below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, a portion of the V winning image WP is visible even when the V winning image WP is covered with the character image. However, the entirety of the V winning image WP may be covered with the character image, making the V winning image WP invisible.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the winning image/character image superimposed effects A to C shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. The winning image/character image superimposed effects A to C may not include part of the effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, or may include other effects. In addition, the winning image/character image superimposed effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state later;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
a first display in which an image in which the second image overlaps at least part of the first image, and a first display in which the second image does not overlap are displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing:
◇[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first display, a portion of the first image is displayed without overlapping the second image.
◇ [Aspect D3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a third image suggesting hitting to the right;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first display, an image in which the third image is partially superimposed on the first image is displayed.
◇[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-3,
A gaming machine, wherein the first image changes in shape to represent a state in which a three-dimensional figure is rotating.
◇ [Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-3 or aspect D3-4,
A gaming machine, wherein the first image is a V winning image.

The timer image moving effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. This timer image movement effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols or during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the timer image moving effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect displayed on 7a.

[Timer image movement effect A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect A. FIG. In the timer image movement effect A, first, the button image display of FIG. 98(A) is executed. This button image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of the decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. A wall image HA is displayed above the first button image BI1. The wall image HA partially overlaps the first button image BI1, and slides leftward at a predetermined timing.

Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 98(B) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA slides leftward, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position (first position) on the wall image HA, and partially overlaps the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type. Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 98(C) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA is further slid leftward, the first timer image TN1 moves leftward from the first position. Also, a lighting effect is performed in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color, and after the lighting effect starts, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 98(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at the first position on the wall image HA. At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position on the wall image HA. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the current wall image HA, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and partially overlap the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 98(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the wall image HA, a character image (button operation) of "Press!" A promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the production button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 98(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Timer image movement effect B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect B. FIG. In the timer image movement effect B, first, the button image display of FIG. 99(A) is executed. This button image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, as in FIG. 98(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. A stage image ST is displayed below the first button image BI1, and the image configuration is such that the first button image BI1 is arranged on the stage image ST. The stage image ST and the first button image BI1 are deformed at a predetermined timing such that the button and the stereoscopic image of the stage are horizontally rotated. Hereinafter, this deformation of the image is also referred to as a horizontal rotation effect.

Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 99(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the stage image ST along with the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1. A first timer image TN1 appearing from the right side of the stage image ST is displayed on the stage image ST and is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 is temporarily stopped, and the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the first position. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 99(C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves leftward from the first position as the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 resumes. Along with the horizontal rotation effect, a light emission effect in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color is performed, and after the start of this light emission effect, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the stage image ST. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 99(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right side of the stage image ST is stopped and displayed at the first position by temporarily stopping the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1. . At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the stage image ST, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the stage image ST. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are adjacent to the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 99(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the stage image ST, a character image (button An operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the production button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Timer image movement effect C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect C. FIG. In the timer image movement effect C, first, the button image display of FIG. 100(A) is executed. This button image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, as in FIG. 98(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 100(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, moves leftward, and is connected to a predetermined position (first position) on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 at the first position is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type. Next, the timer image moving effect of FIG. 100(C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to a predetermined position (second position) below the first button image BI1. Also, a lighting effect is performed in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color, and after the lighting effect starts, a second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 100(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right side of the display screen 7a moves leftward and is connected to the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The position where the second timer image TN2 is connected is the same as the position where the first timer image TN1 was initially connected. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at the second position below the first button image BI1, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are adjacent to the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 100(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are connected (adjacent) to the first button image BI1, a character image of "Press!" is displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation prompting image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 100(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer image movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, a first effect in which the first timer image TN1 is displayed while the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a; After the first effect, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at another position on the display screen 7a, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the position where the first timer image TN1 was displayed. and are configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98(B), 99(B), and 100(B), the first timer image TN1 when the first timer image is displayed is the first button image BI1. next to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98(D), 99(D), and 100(D), the first timer image TN1 when the second timer image is displayed is replaced by the second timer image TN2. Adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98(D), 99(D), and 100(D), when the second timer image is displayed, the first timer image TN1 is the first button image BI1. next to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98(C), 99(C), and 100(C), before the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position, the first A lighting effect of the button image BI1 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operating section (here, the effect button 63) of the gaming machine 1. there is According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer image movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the two timer images TN1 and TN2 are configured to be able to execute effects. However, instead of the first button image BI1, the gaming machine 1 may use an image having a different appearance shape of the operation unit than the effect button 63 to execute a similar effect. Also, the gaming machine 1 may execute a similar effect using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit instead of the first button image BI1. A specific image is an image including arbitrary characters such as character images, graphics, symbols, and the like. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel presentation, and to improve interest.

[Modification 2]
The timers of the timer images TN in FIGS. 98 to 100 are of the countdown type, but may be of the countup type. Also, the timer image TN does not have to be adjacent to the button image BB.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image movement effects A to C shown in FIGS. 98 to 100 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Also, the timer image movement effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, or may include other effects. Further, the timer image movement effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 98 to 100 in terms of the positions and movement directions of the operation section images, decoration patterns, and pending icons, and may be arbitrary positions and movement directions.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a first timer image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second timer image;
a first effect in which the first timer image is displayed at a first position in a state in which the first image is displayed on the display means; and after the first effect, the first timer. and a second effect in which an image is displayed at a second position and the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the first timer image at the first position is adjacent to the first image.
◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
The gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the first image.
◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
In the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the second timer image at the first position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-4,
A gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, a predetermined effect using the first image is performed before the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
◇[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5 further comprises
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is an image representing an appearance of the operating means.

The timer image tilt display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. FIG. This timer image tilt display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols or during the ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the timer image tilt display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Timer image tilt display effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect A. FIG. In the timer image tilt display effect A, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 101(A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. A first timer image TN1 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and a fan-shaped area image SC is displayed over the entire display screen 7a. The area image SC is different in color from the rest of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is displayed at a lower right predetermined position (first position) on the area image SC. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of timer countdown type.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 101(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the fan-shaped area image SC and is displayed obliquely compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 101(C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left from the first position on the area image SC, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the area image SC at a predetermined timing. be done. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the area image SC, and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees compared to when it was displayed at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 101(D) is executed. Specifically, like the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the area image SC and is displayed obliquely compared to when it was displayed at the first position. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves to the lower left along the area image SC and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees or more compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Also, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emitting effect or an enlarged effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 101(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of "Press!" A promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the production button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 101(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Timer image tilt display effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect B. FIG. In the timer image tilt display effect B, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 102(A) is executed. This first timer image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, as in FIG. 101(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. A first timer image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined position (first position) near the center of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is positioned above the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 102(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 rotates to the left (counterclockwise rotation) at the first position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed obliquely compared to the state when it appeared on the display screen 7a. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 102(C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 is displayed, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at a second position near the center on the right side of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed at the first position at an angle of approximately 90 degrees.

Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 102(D) is executed. Specifically, like the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 rotates to the left (counterclockwise rotation) at the second position and is displayed obliquely compared to the state when it appeared on the display screen 7a. be done. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed tilted by about 90 degrees or more compared to the state when it appeared on the display screen 7a. Also, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emitting effect or an enlarged effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 102(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of "Press!" A promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation effective period of the production button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Timer image tilt display effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect C. FIG. In the timer image tilt display effect C, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 103(A) is executed. This first timer image display is performed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, as in FIG. 101(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. A first timer image TN1 is displayed at a position (first position) adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 103B is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed obliquely compared to when it was displayed at the first position. The first timer image TN1 is in contact with the first button image BI1 even during movement. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 103(C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves from the first position to the upper left along the first button image BI1, at a predetermined timing, the first timer image TN1 moves to the first position adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1. , the second timer image TN2 is displayed. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the first button image BI1, and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees compared to when it was displayed at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 103(D) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed obliquely compared to when it was displayed at the first position. be. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves to the lower left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees or more compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Also, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emitting effect or an enlarged effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 103(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in contact with the first button image BI1 are displayed, a character image of "Press!" is displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation prompting image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 103(F), the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position. After that, the production pattern is stop-displayed as a losing pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer image tilt display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101(B), 102(B), and 103(B), the first timer is activated while the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is configured to be able to execute a first effect in which the image TN1 is displayed tilted at a predetermined angle with respect to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the first timer image TN1 is adjacent to the first button image BI1 in the first effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first effect shown in FIGS. 101(B), 102(B), and 103(B), FIGS. As shown in C), it is configured to be able to execute a second effect in which the first timer image TN1 tilted at an angle different from that during the first effect is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operating section (here, the effect button 63) of the gaming machine 1. there is According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the countdown value displayed in the first timer image TN1 reaches a predetermined value, as shown in FIGS. In addition, a third effect in which the size of the first timer image TN1 is changed can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the novel performance, and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer image tilt display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the two timer images TN1 and TN2 are configured to enable execution of effects. However, instead of the first button image BI1, the gaming machine 1 may use an image having a different appearance shape of the operation unit than the effect button 63 to execute a similar effect. Also, the gaming machine 1 may execute a similar effect using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit instead of the first button image BI1. A specific image is an image including arbitrary characters such as character images, figures, symbols, and the like. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel performance, and to improve interest.

[Modification 2]
Although the timers of the timer images TN in FIGS. 101 to 103 are of the countdown type, they may be of the countup type. Also, the timer image TN in FIGS. 101 to 103 may or may not be adjacent to the button image BI1. Also, the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in FIGS. 101 to 103 may or may not be adjacent to each other.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image tilt display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 101 to 103 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Also, the timer image tilt display effects A to C may not include some of the effects shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, or may include other effects. Further, the tilted timer image display effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 101 to 103 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the operating section images, decoration patterns, and pending icons, and may be arbitrary positions and moving directions.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a timer image;
A game characterized by being capable of executing a first effect in which the timer image is displayed at a predetermined angle with respect to the first image while the first image is being displayed on the display means. machine.
◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the timer image is adjacent to the first image.
◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which the timer image tilted at an angle different from that during the first effect is displayed after the first effect.
◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3 further comprises
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine, wherein the first image is an image representing an appearance of the operating means.
◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
A gaming machine capable of executing a third effect in which the size of the timer image changes when the countdown value displayed in the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

The timer button effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. This timer button effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols (during one variable effect) (for example, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game.

[Timer button effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the timer button effect A. FIG.
In the timer button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the first button display effect is executed. In this first button display effect, the button image C3A is displayed. The button image C3A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3B and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3B is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image C3B shown in FIG. 104B shows "50 seconds" as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), the second button display effect is executed. In this second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3B are displayed. The button image C3C is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image C3C is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image representing a state in which the color of the button image C3A is darkened and/or a state in which the button image C3A is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image C3C, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. The timer image C3B indicates that the timer value is "0 seconds". The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3B becomes "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), when the player presses the effect button 63, the accessory movable effect is executed. This accessory movable production is a production in which the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the unfolded position and arranged on the display screen 7a (the position where the display screen 7a is hidden). This role object movable effect functions as a chance increase.

[Timer button effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the timer button effect B. FIG.
In the timer button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the first button display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 104(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3D and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3D is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, and is arranged within the button image C3A. The timer image C3D shown in FIG. 105B shows "30 seconds" as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the second button display effect is executed. In this second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3D are displayed. The timer image C3D shows a timer value of "0 seconds" in the button image C3C. The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3D becomes "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), when the player presses the effect button 63, a re-timer display effect is executed. In this re-timer display effect, the timer display is executed again, that is, the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed. In this case, similarly to FIG. 105B, the timer image C3D is arranged within the button image C3A. Note that the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 105(D) shows "50 seconds" as the timer initial value, which is longer than in the case of FIG. 105(B). As a result, the re-timer display effect can suggest that the expectation for the big win is high.

In the timer display effects of the timer button effects A and B, a plurality of patterns are prepared for the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D. For example, as the timer initial values of timer images C3B and C3D, the first pattern is set to 50 seconds and 30 seconds, respectively, as shown in FIGS. They are set to long 70 seconds and 50 seconds, respectively. In this case, when the second pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer images C3B and C3D, the expectation for the big win is higher than when the first pattern is set. When the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed in the first pattern and when displayed in the second pattern, they function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer button presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the timer button effects A and B, when the button image C3A is being displayed, the timer image is displayed, and after the timer image is displayed, , the button image C3C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed in response to the timer value of the timer image becoming a predetermined value (0 seconds). According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change of the button image from the timer display, and can suppress missing the pressing timing of the effect button 63 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the rate of participation of the players in the game presentation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one variation effect. According to this configuration, since the timer value shifts from the initial value (50 seconds or 30 seconds) to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one variable effect, the player can see the change in the button image from the timer display without error. It can be recognized, and it is possible to suppress missing the pressing timing of the production button 63. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to improve the rate of participation of the players in the game presentation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, in the timer button effect B, when the button image C3A is being displayed, the timer image C3D is displayed. When the timer value of C3D reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image C3C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and when the player presses the effect button 63, A re-timer display effect is executed in which the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed again. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change of the button image from the timer display, can suppress missing the pressing timing of the effect button 63, and the timer display is displayed again after pressing the effect button 63. As it is executed, the player can be given a surprise. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play while improving the participation rate of the player in the game performance. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, in the timer button effect B, the timer image C3D is displayed within the button image C3A. According to this configuration, the timer display can give the player a strong sense of an effect related to the effect button 63 (such as a button-pressing effect), thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up production (chance-up display). According to this configuration, it is possible to create a chance-up effect with the timer initial value, so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the expectation of a big win is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. . According to this configuration, the chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer button effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In response to the pressing, the accessory movement effect and the re-timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the second button effect, even if the player does not press the effect button 63 in spite of the button image C3C being displayed, the character movement effect and the re-timer display effect are executed. good too.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be executed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer button effects shown in FIGS. may be displayed at the same time.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer values count down, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the timeout display effect described above can be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the expectation of a big win is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the timer button effects A and B, when the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed, the timer images may be displayed in a first color (for example, blue) or in a second color ( For example, gold) may be displayed, and each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the second color is set more than the first color. However, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In response to the pressing, the accessory movement effect and the re-timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the second button effect, the button image C3C is displayed, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a pseudo-continuous effect, a jackpot preview effect, a reach development destination preview effect, and a jackpot expectation level are generated according to the depression. Effect such as suggestion effect, pending change notice, or look-ahead start notice may be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C3-1]
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
an operation unit operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The second display effect is a effect of performing a first timer display,
the third display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the timer value of the first timer display in the second display effect becomes a predetermined value. Depending on the situation, the third display effect may be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C3-2]
After starting the variable display of the symbols, it is provided with a symbol display means capable of performing the variable symbol display to be stopped,
The combination effect may be performed during one time of the symbol variation display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-3]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of performing a second timer display,
The combination effect is a effect that may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed, and when the player operates the operation unit, the fourth display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-4]
In the combination effect, the first timer display in the second display effect may be displayed in the area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-5]
The first timer display in the second display effect is one mode of timer display among a plurality of modes of timer display including a first mode of timer display and a second mode of timer display. done,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first aspect, it functions as a first chance up display,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second mode, it functions as a second chance-up display with a higher chance of winning a big win than the first chance-up display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-6]
The timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display has an initial timer value of a first length,
The timer display of the second aspect of the first timer display has an initial timer value of a second length that is longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5, characterized by:

The timer pseudo continuous effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. This timer pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during the variation performance of the decorative symbols (during one variation performance), for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, during the ready-to-win performance, and the like.

[Timer pseudo-continuous effect A]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo continuous effect A. FIG.
In the timer pseudo continuous effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C4A is displayed. The timer image C4A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. A timer image C4A shown in FIG. 106A shows "15 seconds" as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), button pressing effect A is executed. In the button pressing effect A, a button image C4B and a timer image C4A are displayed. The button image C4B is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, it is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image C4B is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and an image representing a state in which the color of the button image C4D is darkened and/or a state in which the button image C4D is lit. is. Adjacent to the button image C4B, the characters "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. FIG. The timer image C4A indicates that the timer value is "0 seconds". The button image C4B is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes "0 seconds". The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed after reaching a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before the timer value reaches “0 seconds”. It should be noted that the valid operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C4B disappears after the effective operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a pseudo-continuous effect A is executed. In the pseudo-continuation effect A, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image C4C is displayed. The pseudo-continuous suggestive image C4C is an image reminiscent of the pseudo-continuous effect, and more specifically, "pseudo × 2" indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is the second time is shown. Further, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern suggesting the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the manner of "7, logo symbol, 7".
After the pseudo continuous effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As the predetermined production, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or look-ahead start announcement are executed. obtain.
The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Timer pseudo continuous effect B]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo continuous effect B. FIG.
In the timer pseudo continuous effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the timer button display effect A is executed. In this timer button display effect A, a timer image C4A and a button image C4D are displayed. The button image C4D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is anticipated that the effect using the effect button 63 will be executed from now on. The timer image C4A is the same as the timer image C4A in FIG. 106A, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and "15 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), button pressing effect A is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 106(B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), pseudo-continuous effect A is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 106(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), timer button display effect B is executed. In timer button display effect B, timer image C4A and button image C4D are displayed. The button image C4D is the same as the button image C4D in FIG. 107(A). The timer image C4A shows "30 seconds" as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), similarly to FIG. 107(B), button pressing effect B is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), pseudo-continuous effect B is executed. In the pseudo-continuation effect B, a pseudo-continuation suggestive image C4E is displayed. The pseudo-continuous suggestive image C4E is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-continuous effect, and more specifically, "pseudo × 3" is shown to suggest that the pseudo-continuous effect is the third time. Further, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern suggesting the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the manner of "7, logo symbol, 7".
After the pseudo continuous effect B, a predetermined effect is executed. As the predetermined production, various productions such as reach production, super reach production, chance up production (big hit expectation indication production), jackpot announcement production, reach development destination announcement production, pending change announcement, or look-ahead start announcement are executed. obtain.

In the timer display effects in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B, a plurality of patterns are prepared for the timer initial value of the timer image C4A. For example, as the timer initial value of timer image C4A, the first pattern is set to 15 seconds, and the second pattern is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the first pattern, as shown in FIG. In this case, in the timer display effect, the probability of the timer pseudo-continuous effect B occurring when the second pattern is set is higher than when the first pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A. That is, after the pseudo-continuous effect, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 107(F)) is performed again is high. When the timer initial value of timer image C4A is displayed in the first pattern and when displayed in the second pattern, it functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer pseudo continuous effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the timer image C4A is displayed in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B, and the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In response to this, a button image C4B prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and a pseudo continuous effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a feeling of surprise rather than simply executing a pseudo-continuous effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the timer pseudo continuous effect B, a button image C4D and a timer image C4A suggesting that a button effect using the effect button 63 will be performed are displayed. In response to the timer value of the timer image C4A reaching a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image C4B prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and the player presses the effect button 63. A pseudo-continuous effect is executed in accordance with. According to this configuration, by displaying the button image C4D, it is possible to anticipate the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and to add excitement to the progress of the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B are executed during one variable effect. According to this configuration, since the timer value shifts from the initial value to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one variable effect, the player can recognize the change in the button image without error from the timer display, and the effect is achieved. It is possible to prevent the user from missing the pressing timing of the button 63 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the rate of participation of the players in the game presentation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the timer pseudo-continuous effect B, after the pseudo-continuous effect A is executed, the timer button display effect is executed again (see FIG. 107(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a surprise, and to give the player a sense of anticipation for the realization of the pseudo-continuous effect again, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B. functions as a chance-up production (chance-up display). According to this configuration, it is possible to create a chance-up effect with the timer initial value, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B. each function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the probability of the timer pseudo continuous effect B occurring when the second pattern is set is higher than when the first pattern is set, that is, After the pseudo-continuous effect, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 107(F)) will be performed again is high. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect can be created with the timer initial value, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the timer pseudo-continuous effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, the button image C4B is displayed in the button pressing effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. , and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in response to the pressing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the player does not press the effect button 63 in spite of the fact that the button image C4B is displayed in the button pressing effect, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , B may be executed over a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the timer image C4A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image C4A may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value is counted up. In this case, when a predetermined value is reached, the timeout display effect described above can be executed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B. each function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the probability of the timer pseudo continuous effect B occurring when the second pattern is set is higher than when the first pattern is set, that is, After the pseudo-continuous effect, there is a high probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 107(F)) will be performed again, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, when the timer initial value of timer image C4A is displayed, the timer image may be displayed in a first color (for example, blue) or in a second color (for example, , Gold), each of which functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display). , timer pseudo-continuous effect B, that is, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 107(F)) is performed again after the pseudo-continuous effect is high.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B shown in FIGS. The above timer images may be displayed at the same time.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C4-1]
effect display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
an operation unit operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of performing a first timer display,
the second display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation portion image representing the operation portion and prompting the player to operate the operation portion;
the third display effect is a pseudo continuous effect;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the timer value of the first timer display in the first display effect reaches a predetermined value, the second display effect is performed. , the third display effect may be performed in response to the operation of the operation unit by the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C4-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination effect is a effect that may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display may be performed when the first display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-3]
After starting the variable display of the symbols, it is provided with a symbol display means capable of performing the variable symbol display to be stopped,
The combination effect may be performed during one time of the symbol variation display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-4]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect for performing a second timer display,
The combined effect is a effect that may include a fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect may be performed after the third display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-5]
The first timer display in the first display effect is one mode of timer display among a plurality of modes of timer display including a first mode of timer display and a second mode of timer display. done,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first mode, it functions as a first chance up display,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second mode, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed in the combination effect. function as a second chance-up display with a higher expectation than the first chance-up display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-4, characterized by:
[Aspect C4-6]
The timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display has an initial timer value of a first length,
The timer display of the second aspect of the timer display has an initial timer value of a second length that is longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5, characterized by:

The pending change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG. This pending change effect is performed in parallel with the variable effect of the decorative pattern. Of course, this includes the execution of a reach effect (super reach effect).

[Holding change effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect A. FIG. The pending change effect A is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the prefetch effect patterns A and B described above. The pending change effect A has two aspects based on the look-ahead effect pattern.

First, in the pending change effect A, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. In addition, a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

As one aspect following the variable start effect, a change display effect (1) is executed as shown in FIG. 108(B). In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed in which the change image CG1 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white. This suspension image HGW corresponds to the target suspension of the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a pending change effect (1) is performed. In the pending change effect (1), the white pending image HGW changes to the blue pending image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

On the other hand, as another mode following the variable start effect, as shown in FIG. 108(E), change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(F), change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed in which the change image CG2 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(G), a pending change effect (2) is performed. In the pending change effect (2), the white pending image HGW changes to the red pending image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Holding change effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect B. FIG. The pending change effect B is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the prefetch effect patterns A and B described above.

First, in the pending change effect B, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. In addition, a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B), change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(C), change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed in which the change image CG1 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), suspension change effect (1) is performed. In the pending change effect (1), the white pending image HGW changes to the blue pending image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), change display effect (1) is executed in which a change image CG1 is displayed, as in FIG. 109(B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), the change movement effect (1) is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 109(C), and the change image CG1 is sucked from the pending image HGW into the changed pending image HGB. is done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(G), a pending change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the blue hold image HGB further changes to a red hold image HGR.

[Holding change effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect C. FIG. The pending change effect C is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the prefetch effect patterns A and B described above.

First, in the pending change effect C, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start production, the decoration pattern during fluctuation is displayed on the upper left. In addition, a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), a button pressing promotion effect is executed. In the button pressing promotion effect, a button image BB representing the effect button 63 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a text image TG reading "Continuous hits!" is displayed together with the button image BB. As a result, the player is urged to hit the performance button 63 repeatedly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(C), change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue. At this time, a button pressing promotion effect is also performed in parallel.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(D), change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red. At this time, a button pressing promotion effect is also performed in parallel.

That is, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 by executing the button pressing promotion effect, the blue change image CG1 is displayed first, and then the red change image CG2 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(E), change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed in which the change image CG2 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(F), a pending change effect (2) is performed. In the pending change effect (2), the white pending image HGW changes to the red pending image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, an elliptical change image labeled "Change" is displayed as a change display effect. The pending image HGW is changed in correspondence with this change image. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect a change in the pending image by the change image, and to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 108(B), the white pending image HGW is displayed as shown in FIGS. 108(C) and 108(D). is changed to the blue held image HGB. Further, when the red change image CG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 108(E), the white pending image HGW changes to the red pending image HGR as shown in FIGS. 108(F) and 108(G). be changed. According to this configuration, the displayed change images CG1 and CG2 can be expected to change to the hold images HGB and HGR, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 109(B), the white pending image HGW is displayed as shown in FIGS. 109(C) and 109(D). is changed to the blue held image HGB. Further, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed again as shown in FIG. 109(E), the blue pending image HGB changes to the red pending image HGR as shown in FIGS. 109(F) and 109(G). can be changed to According to this configuration, by displaying the change image CG1 again, it is possible to expect a change to the hold image HGR, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108(C), (F), FIGS. 109(C), (F), and FIG. 110(E), the change movement effect is performed. In the change-moving effect, the change-moving effect is performed such that the change image is sucked into one of the pending images 9A, and the pending image is changed. According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a change in the pending image, and to improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(B), a button depression promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63 repeatedly. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 110(C) and 110(D). According to this configuration, since the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed by operating the effect button 63, interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the present embodiment are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, an elliptical change image labeled "Change" is displayed as a change display effect. The pending image HGW is changed in correspondence with this change image. Here, the blue change image CG1 and the red change image CG2 are taken as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be three or more types of change images.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 108(B), it changes to a blue pending image HGB, and as shown in FIG. When CG2 is displayed, it changes to red pending image HGR. In other words, the change image and the pending image after the change correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, two or more types of change images may correspond to one pending image, and one change image may correspond to two or more types of pending images.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(B), a button depression promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63 repeatedly. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 110(C) and 110(D). On the other hand, even if the effect button 63 is not operated, the change display effect shown in FIGS. 110(C) and 110(D) may be performed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(B), a button depression promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63 repeatedly. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 110(C) and 110(D). On the other hand, if the production button 63 is not operated, the change display production shown in FIGS. A holding change effect as shown may be performed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(B), a button depression promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63 repeatedly. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 110(C) and 110(D). As another mode for this, when the effect button 63 is hit repeatedly, the effect may be such that the change display effect (2) as shown in FIG. 110(D) is not performed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 108(C) and 108(D), it is conceivable to execute change movement effect (1) and hold change effect (1).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
display means capable of informing the number of pending by the number of displayed pending images;
A gaming machine comprising a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
The effect means is capable of displaying a plurality of change notice images for notifying a change in the pending image,
A gaming machine, wherein the holding image is changed in correspondence with the plurality of change notice images.

[Aspect C5-2]
For one of the reserved images, when the first change notice image is displayed, the reserved image is changed to the first reserved image, and when the second change notice image is displayed, the reserved image is changed. A gaming machine characterized by changing to a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-3]
When a first change notice image is displayed for one of the hold images, the hold image is changed to the first hold image, and when the first change notice image is displayed again, the hold image is changed. A game machine characterized by changing an image to a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-4]
A game machine characterized in that the displayed change notice image acts on one of the reserved images, and then changes the reserved image.

[Aspect C5-5]
An operation means that can be operated by the player is further provided,
A game machine, wherein the plurality of change notice images are displayed after the operation means is operated.

[Other Modifications]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer value of the timer image is used as the timer display to indicate the time, but the timer display is not limited to this, and the timer display may be a meter method or an indicator method.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

In addition, among the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 . In this case, the display effects described above may be executed by the sub-display device.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1... Game machine 3... Game area 7... Image display device 9A... First reservation icon 9B... First reservation icon 9C... Second reservation icon 15... Board movable body 20... First start port (first entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
81... Game control microcomputer 91... Production control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
The pending icon includes an icon representing pending and an icon representing the pending,
It is configured to notify the number of pending by the number of display of the pending icon,
The pending icon is an icon that can be displayed in multiple modes,
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed,
The first effect is a effect that may change the mode of the pending icon from the first mode to the second mode,
The second effect is performed after the first effect, and based on the change of the pending icon from the first mode to the second mode, from the changed pending icon in the first direction It is an effect in which predetermined information is displayed in the first area located,
In the second effect, when the predetermined information is displayed in the first area located in the first direction from the changed pending icon, a predetermined medium having a closed shape is used as a predetermined object. Medium display is executed to reach the first area from the holding icon through
The third effect is performed after the second effect, and the effect indicated by the predetermined information displayed in the first area is performed in the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images